diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'source/zh-CN/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide.po')
| -rw-r--r-- | source/zh-CN/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide.po | 1602 |
1 files changed, 801 insertions, 801 deletions
diff --git a/source/zh-CN/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide.po b/source/zh-CN/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide.po index c93ca25edeb..40acc11808e 100644 --- a/source/zh-CN/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide.po +++ b/source/zh-CN/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide.po @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: https://bugs.libreoffice.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=LibreOffice&bug_status=UNCONFIRMED&component=UI\n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2018-11-05 17:38+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-02-03 19:07+0000\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-02-24 17:19+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Dian LI <xslidian@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n" "Language: zh_CN\n" @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ msgstr "" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;\n" "X-Accelerator-Marker: ~\n" "X-Generator: Pootle 2.8\n" -"X-POOTLE-MTIME: 1549220844.000000\n" +"X-POOTLE-MTIME: 1551028797.000000\n" #: anchor_object.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147251\n" "help.text" msgid "You can use anchors to position an object, graphic, or frame in a document. An anchored item remains in place, or moves when you modify the document. The following anchoring options are available:" -msgstr "可以使用锁定在文档中定位对象、图形或框架。当修改文档时，锁定项会相应地移动，或者固定在原有位置。下面列出了可以使用的锁定选项：" +msgstr "可以使用锁定在文档中定位对象、图形或框架。当修改文档时，锁定项会相应地移动，或者固定在原有位置。下面列出了可以使用的锁定选项:" #: anchor_object.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145622\n" "help.text" msgid "Effect" -msgstr "<emph>功能说明</emph>" +msgstr "效果" #: anchor_object.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3151181\n" "help.text" msgid "Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased." -msgstr "将选定的项当作字符锁定在当前文字中。如果选定项的高度大于当前字体的大小，则会增加该项所在行的高度。" +msgstr "将选中的项当作字符锁定在当前文字中。如果选中项的高度大于当前字体的大小，则会增加该项所在行的高度。" #: anchor_object.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3151235\n" "help.text" msgid "Anchors the selected item to a character." -msgstr "将选定的项锁定到字符。" +msgstr "将选中的项锁定到字符。" #: anchor_object.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155094\n" "help.text" msgid "Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph." -msgstr "将选定的项锁定到当前段落。" +msgstr "将选中的项锁定到当前段落。" #: anchor_object.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155144\n" "help.text" msgid "Anchors the selected item to the current page." -msgstr "将选定的项锁定到当前页。" +msgstr "将选中的项锁定到当前页。" #: anchor_object.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145697\n" "help.text" msgid "Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame." -msgstr "将选定的项锁定到周围的框架。" +msgstr "将选中的项锁定到周围的框架。" #: anchor_object.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145715\n" "help.text" msgid "When you insert an object, graphic, or frame, an anchor icon appears where the item is anchored. You can position an anchored item by dragging the item to another location. To change the anchoring options of an item, right-click the item, and then choose an option from the <item type=\"menuitem\">Anchor</item> submenu." -msgstr "在插入对象、图形或框架时，锁定图标显示在项目的锁定位置。您可以通过将锁定的项拖到其他位置来定位该项。要修改项的锁定选项，请在该项上单击鼠标右键，然后从<item type=\"menuitem\">锁定</item>子菜单中选择选项。" +msgstr "在插入对象、图形或框架时，锁定图标显示在项目的锁定位置。您可以通过将锁定的项拖到其他位置来定位该项。要修改项的锁定选项，请在该项上点击鼠标右键，然后从<item type=\"menuitem\">锁定</item>子菜单中选择选项。" #: arrange_chapters.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ msgctxt "" "tit\n" "help.text" msgid "Rearranging a Document by Using the Navigator" -msgstr "使用“导航”重新排列文档" +msgstr "使用「导航」重新排列文档" #: arrange_chapters.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3149973\n" "help.text" msgid "<variable id=\"arrange_chapters\"><link href=\"text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp\" name=\"Rearranging a Document by Using the Navigator\">Arranging Chapters in the Navigator</link> </variable>" -msgstr "<variable id=\"arrange_chapters\"><link href=\"text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp\" name=\"使用“导航”排列文档\">在“导航”中排列章节</link></variable>" +msgstr "<variable id=\"arrange_chapters\"><link href=\"text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp\" name=\"使用「导航」排列文档\">在「导航」中排列章节</link></variable>" #: arrange_chapters.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145652\n" "help.text" msgid "To quickly move the text cursor to a heading in the document, double-click the heading in the <emph>Navigator</emph> list." -msgstr "要将文字光标快速移到文档中的某个标题处，请直接在<emph>导航</emph>列表中双击这个标题。" +msgstr "要将文字光标快速移到文档中的某个标题处，请直接在「<emph>导航</emph>」列表中双击这个标题。" #: arrange_chapters.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id0915200809400790\n" "help.text" msgid "Ensure that all heading levels are shown in the Navigator. By default all levels are shown. See steps below how to change the heading levels that are shown." -msgstr "确保所有标题级别都显示在了“导航”中。默认显示所有级别。请参考下面如何更改显示的标题级别的步骤。" +msgstr "确保所有标题级别都显示在了「导航」中。默认显示所有级别。请参考下面如何更改显示的标题级别的步骤。" #: arrange_chapters.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3151206\n" "help.text" msgid "On the <emph>Standard Bar</emph>, click the <emph>Navigator</emph> icon <image id=\"img_id5211883\" src=\"cmd/sc_navigator.png\"><alt id=\"alt_id5211883\">Icon</alt></image> to open the <emph>Navigator</emph>." -msgstr "在<emph>标准工具栏</emph>中，单击<emph>导航</emph> 图标 <image id=\"img_id5211883\" src=\"cmd/sc_navigator.png\" width=\"0.564cm\" height=\"0.564cm\"><alt id=\"alt_id5211883\">图标</alt></image>打开<emph>导航</emph>。" +msgstr "在「<emph>标准工具栏</emph>」中，点击「<emph>导航</emph>」图标 <image id=\"img_id5211883\" src=\"cmd/sc_navigator.png\"><alt id=\"alt_id5211883\">图标</alt></image>打开「<emph>导航</emph>」。" #: arrange_chapters.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155089\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: arrange_chapters.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155424\n" "help.text" msgid "Select the heading in the <emph>Navigator</emph> list." -msgstr "选择<emph>导航</emph>列表中的标题。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>导航</emph>」列表中的标题。" #: arrange_chapters.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ msgctxt "" "tit\n" "help.text" msgid "Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type" -msgstr "键入时创建编号/项目符号列表" +msgstr "输入时创建编号/项目符号列表" #: auto_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ msgctxt "" "bm_id3147407\n" "help.text" msgid "<bookmark_value>numbering; lists, while typing</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>bullet lists;creating while typing</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>lists;automatic numbering</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>numbers;lists</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>automatic bullets/numbers; AutoCorrect function</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>bullets; using automatically</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>paragraphs; automatic numbering</bookmark_value>" -msgstr "<bookmark_value>编号; 列表，键入时</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>项目符号列表; 键入时创建</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>列表; 自动编号</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>编号; 列表</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>自动项目符号/编号; 自动更正功能</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>项目符号; 自动使用</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>段落; 自动编号</bookmark_value>" +msgstr "<bookmark_value>编号; 列表，输入时</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>项目符号列表; 输入时创建</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>列表; 自动编号</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>编号; 列表</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>自动项目符号/编号; 自动更正功能</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>项目符号; 自动使用</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>段落; 自动编号</bookmark_value>" #: auto_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3147407\n" "help.text" msgid "<variable id=\"auto_numbering\"><link href=\"text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp\" name=\"Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type\">Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type</link></variable>" -msgstr "<variable id=\"auto_numbering\"><link href=\"text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp\" name=\"Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type\">键入时创建编号或项目符号列表</link></variable>" +msgstr "<variable id=\"auto_numbering\"><link href=\"text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp\" name=\"Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type\">输入时创建编号或项目符号列表</link></variable>" #: auto_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155525\n" "help.text" msgid "$[officename] can automatically apply numbering or bullets as you type." -msgstr "当您键入文字时，$[officename] 可以自动应用编号或项目符号。" +msgstr "当您输入文字时，$[officename] 可以自动应用编号或项目符号。" #: auto_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3152830\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options</item>, click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Options</item> tab, and then select “Bulleted and numbered lists”." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正选项</item>，单击<item type=\"menuitem\">选项</item>选项卡，然后选择“应用编号 – 符号”。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正选项</item>」，点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">选项</item>」选项卡，然后选择「应用编号 – 符号」。" #: auto_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id2357860\n" "help.text" msgid "The automatic numbering option is only applied to paragraphs that are formatted with the \"Default\", \"Text body\", or \"Text body indent\" paragraph style." -msgstr "自动编号选项仅适用于采用“默认”、“正文”或“正文缩进”段落样式进行格式化的段落。" +msgstr "自动编号选项仅适用于采用「默认」「正文」或「正文缩进」段落样式进行格式化的段落。" #: auto_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3152897\n" "help.text" msgid "To Create a Numbered or Bulleted List While You Type" -msgstr "要在键入时创建编号列表或项目符号列表" +msgstr "要在输入时创建编号列表或项目符号列表" #: auto_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147773\n" "help.text" msgid "Type 1., i., or I. to start a numbered list. Type * or - to start a bulleted list. You can also type a right parenthesis after the number instead of a period , for example, 1) or i)." -msgstr "键入 1.、i. 或 I. 以开始建立编号列表。键入 * 或 - 以开始建立项目符号列表。也可以在数字之后键入右圆括号来代替句点，例如，1) 或 i)。" +msgstr "输入 1.、i. 或 I. 以开始建立编号列表。输入 * 或 - 以开始建立项目符号列表。也可以在数字之后输入右圆括号来代替句点，例如，1) 或 i)。" #: auto_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147794\n" "help.text" msgid "Enter a space, type your text, and then press Enter. The new paragraph automatically receives the next number or bullet." -msgstr "输入一个空格，键入文字，然后按 Enter 键。新的段落会自动应用下一个编号或项目符号。" +msgstr "输入一个空格，输入文字，然后按 Enter 键。新的段落会自动应用下一个编号或项目符号。" #: auto_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147833\n" "help.text" msgid "By default, $[officename] automatically corrects many common typing errors and applies formatting while you type." -msgstr "默认情况下，$[officename] 会在您键入时自动更正常见的键入错误，并应用相应的格式。" +msgstr "默认情况下，$[officename] 会在您输入时自动更正常见的输入错误，并应用相应的格式。" #: auto_off.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147274\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options</item>." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正选项</item>。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正选项</item>」。" #: auto_off.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145596\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Replace</emph> tab." -msgstr "单击<emph>替换</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>替换</emph>」选项卡。" #: auto_off.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -502,7 +502,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145620\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>AutoCorrect</emph> list, select the word pair that you want to remove." -msgstr "在<emph>自动更正</emph>列表中，选择要删除的一对字。" +msgstr "在「<emph>自动更正</emph>」列表中，选择要删除的一对字。" #: auto_off.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145645\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Delete</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>删除</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>删除</emph>」。" #: auto_off.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3151196\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options</item>." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正选项</item>。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正选项</item>」。" #: auto_off.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3151220\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Localized Options</emph> tab" -msgstr "单击<emph>本地化选项</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>本地化选项</emph>」选项卡" #: auto_off.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3151245\n" "help.text" msgid "Clear the \"Replace\" check box(es)." -msgstr "清除所有的“替换”复选框。" +msgstr "清除所有的「替换」复选框。" #: auto_off.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -558,7 +558,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155099\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Tools – AutoCorrect Options</item>." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 – 自动更正选项</item>。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 – 自动更正选项</item>」。" #: auto_off.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155123\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Options</emph> tab." -msgstr "单击<emph>选项</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>选项</emph>」选项卡。" #: auto_off.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155148\n" "help.text" msgid "Clear the \"Capitalize first letter of every sentence\" check box." -msgstr "清除“设置每个句子首字母为大写”复选框。" +msgstr "清除「设置每个句子首字母为大写」复选框。" #: auto_off.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -582,7 +582,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3155401\n" "help.text" msgid "To Stop Drawing a Line When You Type Three Identical Characters" -msgstr "停止在键入三个相同字符时绘制线条" +msgstr "停止在输入三个相同字符时绘制线条" #: auto_off.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -590,7 +590,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155415\n" "help.text" msgid "$[officename] automatically draws a line when you type three of the following characters and press Enter: - _ = * ~ #" -msgstr "键入以下字符中的三个并按 Enter 键后，$[officename] 会自动绘制一条线：- _ = * ~ #" +msgstr "输入以下字符中的三个并按 Enter 键后，$[officename] 会自动绘制一条线: - _ = * ~ #" #: auto_off.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155439\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options</item>." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正选项</item>。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正选项</item>」。" #: auto_off.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -606,7 +606,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155463\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Options</emph> tab." -msgstr "单击<emph>选项</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>选项</emph>」选项卡。" #: auto_off.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -614,7 +614,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155488\n" "help.text" msgid "Clear the \"Apply border\" check box." -msgstr "清除“应用边框”复选框。" +msgstr "清除「应用边框」复选框。" #: auto_spellcheck.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -630,7 +630,7 @@ msgctxt "" "bm_id3154265\n" "help.text" msgid "<bookmark_value>spellcheck;Automatic Spell Checking on/off</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>automatic spellcheck</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>checking spelling;while typing</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>words;disabling spellcheck</bookmark_value>" -msgstr "<bookmark_value>拼写检查; 打开/关闭自动拼写检查</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>自动拼写检查</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>检查拼写; 键入时</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>字词; 禁用拼写检查</bookmark_value>" +msgstr "<bookmark_value>拼写检查; 打开/关闭自动拼写检查</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>自动拼写检查</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>检查拼写; 输入时</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>字词; 禁用拼写检查</bookmark_value>" #: auto_spellcheck.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -646,7 +646,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154664\n" "help.text" msgid "You can have $[officename] automatically check spelling while you type and underline possible misspelt words with a red wavy line." -msgstr "$[officename] 可以在您键入时自动检查拼写，并用红色波浪线在可能拼错的字词下面加上下划线。" +msgstr "$[officename] 可以在您输入时自动检查拼写，并用红色波浪线在可能拼错的字词下面加上下划线。" #: auto_spellcheck.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3154678\n" "help.text" msgid "To Check Spelling Automatically While You Type" -msgstr "在键入时自动检查拼写" +msgstr "在输入时自动检查拼写" #: auto_spellcheck.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155531\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Tools - Automatic Spell Checking</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>工具 - 自动拼写检查</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>工具 - 自动拼写检查</emph>」。" #: auto_spellcheck.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -670,7 +670,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155569\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, or from the <emph>AutoCorrect </emph>submenu." -msgstr "在标有红色波浪形下划线的字上单击鼠标右键，可以在弹出的上下文菜单或<emph>自动更正</emph>子菜单中选择建议的替换字词。" +msgstr "在标有红色波浪形下划线的字上点击鼠标右键，可以在弹出的右键菜单或<emph>自动更正</emph>子菜单中选择建议的替换字词。" #: auto_spellcheck.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -686,7 +686,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147819\n" "help.text" msgid "You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing <emph>Add</emph>." -msgstr "您也可以通过从上下文菜单中选择<emph>添加</emph>，将标有下划线的字加入到用户词典中。" +msgstr "您也可以通过从右键菜单中选择「<emph>添加</emph>」，将标有下划线的字加入到用户词典中。" #: auto_spellcheck.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -710,7 +710,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147282\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the Language control on the Status bar to open a menu." -msgstr "单击状态栏上的“语言”控件打开菜单。" +msgstr "点击状态栏上的「语言」控件打开菜单。" #: auto_spellcheck.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145602\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose \"None (Do not check spelling)\"." -msgstr "选择“无（不检查拼写）”。" +msgstr "选择「无（不检查拼写）」。" #: auto_spellcheck.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154254\n" "help.text" msgid "You can prevent AutoCorrect from correcting specific abbreviations or words that have mixed capital letters and lowercase letters." -msgstr "您可以防止“自动更正”校正那些同时包含大写和小写字母的特定缩写和文字。" +msgstr "您可以防止「自动更正」校正那些同时包含大写和小写字母的特定缩写和文字。" #: autocorr_except.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -766,7 +766,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155576\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options</item>, and then click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Exceptions</item> tab." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正选项</item>，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">例外</item>选项卡。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正选项</item>」，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">例外</item>」选项卡。" #: autocorr_except.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -774,7 +774,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147762\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: autocorr_except.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -782,7 +782,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147786\n" "help.text" msgid "Type the abbreviation followed by a period in the <emph>Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) </emph>box and click <emph>New</emph>." -msgstr "在<emph>缩写字母后不带大写字母</emph>框中键入以句点结尾的缩写。" +msgstr "在「<emph>缩写字母后不带大写字母</emph>」框中输入以句点结尾的缩写，然后点击「<emph>新建</emph>」。" #: autocorr_except.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -790,7 +790,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147812\n" "help.text" msgid "Type the word in the <emph>Words with TWo INitial CApitals </emph>box and click <emph>New</emph>." -msgstr "在<emph>以两个连续大写字母开头的词</emph>框中键入文字。" +msgstr "在「<emph>以两个连续大写字母开头的词</emph>」框中输入文字，然后点击「<emph>新建</emph>」。" #: autocorr_except.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -798,7 +798,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3144875\n" "help.text" msgid "To quickly undo an AutoCorrect replacement, press <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Z. This also adds the word or abbreviation that you typed to the AutoCorrect exceptions list." -msgstr "按<switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Z 键可以快速撤消自动更正的替换操作，同时将刚才键入的文字或缩写加入到自动更正的例外列表中。" +msgstr "按<switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Z 键可以快速撤消自动更正的替换操作，同时将刚才输入的文字或缩写加入到自动更正的例外列表中。" #: autotext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -830,7 +830,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150534\n" "help.text" msgid "In $[officename] Writer, you can store text - also containing graphics, tables, and fields - as AutoText, so that you can quickly insert the text later on. If you want, you can also store formatted text." -msgstr "在 $[officename] Writer 中，可以将文本（也包含图形、表格和字段）保存为“自动图文集”，这样以后就可以快速地插入文本了。如果需要，也可以保存带格式的文字。" +msgstr "在 $[officename] Writer 中，可以将文本（也包含图形、表格和字段）保存为「自动图文集」，这样以后就可以快速地插入文本了。如果需要，也可以保存带格式的文字。" #: autotext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -854,7 +854,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155581\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Tools - AutoText</item>." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">文件 - 导出</item>。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">文件 - 导出</item>」。" #: autotext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -870,7 +870,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147779\n" "help.text" msgid "Type a name that is longer than four characters. This allows you to use the <emph>Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing</emph> AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut." -msgstr "键入四个字符以上的名称。这样就可以使用<emph>键入时显示名称提示作为建议</emph>自动图文集选项。如果需要，可以修改推荐的快捷方式。" +msgstr "输入四个字符以上的名称。这样就可以使用<emph>输入时显示名称提示作为建议</emph>自动图文集选项。如果需要，可以修改推荐的快捷方式。" #: autotext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -878,7 +878,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147807\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>AutoText</emph> button, and then choose <emph>New</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>自动图文集</emph>按钮，然后选择<emph>新建</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>自动图文集</emph>」按钮，然后选择「<emph>新建</emph>」。" #: autotext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -886,7 +886,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10732\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Close</emph> button." -msgstr "单击<emph>关闭</emph>按钮。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>关闭</emph>」按钮。" #: autotext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -902,7 +902,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145597\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in your document where you want to insert an AutoText entry." -msgstr "在文档中要插入自动图文集条目的位置单击。" +msgstr "在文档中要插入自动图文集条目的位置点击。" #: autotext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -918,7 +918,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145644\n" "help.text" msgid "Select the AutoText that you want to insert, and then click <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert</item>." -msgstr "选择要插入的自动图文集，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>。" +msgstr "选择要插入的自动图文集，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>」。" #: autotext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -926,7 +926,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145668\n" "help.text" msgid "You can also type the shortcut for an AutoText entry, and then press F3, or click the arrow next to the <item type=\"menuitem\">AutoText</item> icon on the <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert</item> bar, and then choose an AutoText entry." -msgstr "也可以键入“自动图文集”条目的快捷方式，然后按 F3 键；或者单击<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>栏上<item type=\"menuitem\">自动图文集</item>图标旁边的箭头，然后选择“自动图文集”条目。" +msgstr "也可以输入「自动图文集」条目的快捷方式，然后按 F3 键；或者点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>」栏上「<item type=\"menuitem\">自动图文集</item>」图标旁边的箭头，然后选择「自动图文集」条目。" #: autotext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -934,7 +934,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155090\n" "help.text" msgid "To quickly enter a %PRODUCTNAME Math formula, type <item type=\"literal\">fn</item>, and then press F3. If you insert more than one formula, the formulae are sequentially numbered. To insert dummy text, type <item type=\"literal\">dt</item>, and then press F3." -msgstr "要快速输入 %PRODUCTNAME 数学公式，首先键入 <item type=\"literal\">fn</item>，然后按 F3 键。如果您插入多个公式，这些公式会按插入顺序进行编号。要插入示范文字，请键入 <item type=\"literal\">dt</item>，然后按 F3 键。" +msgstr "要快速输入 %PRODUCTNAME 数学公式，首先输入 <item type=\"literal\">fn</item>，然后按 F3 键。如果您插入多个公式，这些公式会按插入顺序进行编号。要插入示范文字，请输入 <item type=\"literal\">dt</item>，然后按 F3 键。" #: autotext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -950,7 +950,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155136\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>工具 - 宏 - 管理宏 - %PRODUCTNAME Basic</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>工具 - 宏 - 管理宏 - %PRODUCTNAME Basic</emph>」。" #: autotext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -974,7 +974,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3151304\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>File - Print</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>文件 - 打印</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>文件 - 打印</emph>」。" #: autotext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -998,7 +998,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3151370\n" "help.text" msgid "For example, you can store \"read-only\" AutoText entries for your company on a central server, and user-defined AutoText entries in a local directory." -msgstr "例如，您可以将公司的“只读”自动图文集条目保存在中央服务器上，而将自定义自动图文集条目保存在本地目录中。" +msgstr "例如，您可以将公司的「只读」自动图文集条目保存在中央服务器上，而将自定义自动图文集条目保存在本地目录中。" #: autotext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1086,7 +1086,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155390\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Format - Character</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>格式 - 字符</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>格式 - 字符</emph>」。" #: background.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1094,7 +1094,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153665\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Background</emph> tab, select the background color." -msgstr "单击<emph>背景</emph>选项卡，选择背景颜色。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>背景</emph>」选项卡，选择背景颜色。" #: background.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1118,7 +1118,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3158430\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Format - Paragraph</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>格式 - 段落</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>格式 - 段落</emph>」。" #: background.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1126,7 +1126,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3151245\n" "help.text" msgid "On the <emph>Background</emph> tab page, select the background color or a background graphic." -msgstr "在<emph>背景</emph>选项卡页面上，选择背景颜色或背景图形。" +msgstr "在「<emph>背景</emph>」选项卡页面上，选择背景颜色或背景图形。" #: background.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1134,7 +1134,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id0104201010554939\n" "help.text" msgid "To select an object in the background, hold down the <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline> key and click the object. Alternatively, use the Navigator to select the object." -msgstr "要选择背景中的对象，请在按住 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline> 键时单击对象。或者，使用“导航”选择对象。" +msgstr "要选择背景中的对象，请在按住 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline> 键时点击对象。或者，使用「导航」选择对象。" #: background.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1166,7 +1166,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154938\n" "help.text" msgid "On the <emph>Background</emph> tab page, select the background color or a background graphic." -msgstr "在<emph>背景</emph>选项卡页面上，选择背景颜色或背景图形。" +msgstr "在「<emph>背景</emph>」选项卡页面上，选择背景颜色或背景图形。" #: background.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1174,7 +1174,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156280\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>For</emph> box, choose whether the color or graphic should apply to the current cell, the current row or the whole table. If you select several cells or rows before opening the dialog, the change applies to the selection." -msgstr "在<emph>用于</emph>框内，选择是将该颜色或图形应用到当前单元格、当前行还是整个表格。如果在打开对话框之前您选择了一些单元格或行，那么这些更改就会应用到所选择的区域中。" +msgstr "在「<emph>用于</emph>」框内，选择是将该颜色或图形应用到当前单元格、当前行还是整个表格。如果在打开对话框之前您选择了一些单元格或行，那么这些更改就会应用到所选择的区域中。" #: background.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1190,7 +1190,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150767\n" "help.text" msgid "To apply a background color to cells, select the cells and click the color on the <emph>Background Color</emph> toolbar." -msgstr "要为单元格应用一种背景颜色，请选中单元格然后单击<emph>背景颜色</emph>工具栏上的颜色。" +msgstr "要为单元格应用一种背景颜色，请选中单元格然后点击「<emph>背景颜色</emph>」工具栏上的颜色。" #: background.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1198,7 +1198,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147084\n" "help.text" msgid "To apply a background color to a text paragraph within a cell, place the cursor into the text paragraph, then click the color on the <item type=\"menuitem\">Background Color</item> toolbar." -msgstr "要为单元格内的文本段落应用一种背景颜色，请先将光标置于文本段落内，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">背景颜色</item>工具栏上的颜色。" +msgstr "要为单元格内的文本段落应用一种背景颜色，请先将光标置于文本段落内，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">背景颜色</item>」工具栏上的颜色。" #: background.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1254,7 +1254,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3116136\n" "help.text" msgid "<variable id=\"border_character\"><link href=\"text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp\" name=\"Defining Borders for Characters\">Defining Borders for Characters</link> </variable>" -msgstr "<variable id=\"border_page\"><link href=\"text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp\" name=\"Defining Borders for Pages\">为页面定义边框</link> </variable>" +msgstr "<variable id=\"border_character\"><link href=\"text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp\" name=\"Defining Borders for Characters\">为字符定义边框</link> </variable>" #: border_character.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1286,7 +1286,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3118473\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Format - Character - Borders</emph>." -msgstr "选择 <emph>格式 - 字符 - 边框</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>格式 - 字符 - 边框</emph>」。" #: border_character.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1302,7 +1302,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3151046\n" "help.text" msgid "Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the <emph>Line</emph> area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style." -msgstr "在<emph>线条</emph>区域中为选定的边框样式选择线条样式、宽度及颜色。这些设置适用于所选定的边框样式所包括的全部边框线条。" +msgstr "在<emph>线条</emph>区域中为选中的边框样式选择线条样式、宽度及颜色。这些设置适用于所选中的边框样式所包括的全部边框线条。" #: border_character.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1318,7 +1318,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3111023\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph> to apply the changes." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph> 以应用更改。" +msgstr "点击<emph>确定</emph> 以应用更改。" #: border_character.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1342,7 +1342,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3111663\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Format - Character - Borders</emph>." -msgstr "选择 <emph>格式 - 字符 - 边框</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>格式 - 字符 - 边框</emph>」。" #: border_character.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1350,7 +1350,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3110541\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>User-defined</emph> area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge." -msgstr "在<emph>用户定义</emph>区域中，选择要在通用版式中显示的边缘。单击预览中显示的边缘以切换边缘。" +msgstr "在<emph>用户定义</emph>区域中，选择要在通用版式中显示的边缘。点击预览中显示的边缘以切换边缘。" #: border_character.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1358,7 +1358,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3119149\n" "help.text" msgid "Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the <emph>Line</emph> area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style." -msgstr "在<emph>线条</emph>区域中为选定的边框样式选择线条样式、宽度及颜色。这些设置适用于所选定的边框样式所包括的全部边框线条。" +msgstr "在<emph>线条</emph>区域中为选中的边框样式选择线条样式、宽度及颜色。这些设置适用于所选中的边框样式所包括的全部边框线条。" #: border_character.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1382,7 +1382,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3141606\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph> to apply the changes." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph> 以应用更改。" +msgstr "点击<emph>确定</emph> 以应用更改。" #: border_object.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1414,7 +1414,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3146797\n" "help.text" msgid "In Writer, you can define borders around OLE objects, plug-ins, diagrams/charts, graphics and frames. The name of the menu to be used depends on the object selected." -msgstr "在 Writer 中，可以为 OLE 对象、插件、图解/图表、图形和框架定义边框。使用的菜单名称取决于所选定的对象。" +msgstr "在 Writer 中，可以为 OLE 对象、插件、图解/图表、图形和框架定义边框。使用的菜单名称取决于所选中的对象。" #: border_object.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1438,7 +1438,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149578\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Borders</emph> icon on the <emph>OLE-Object</emph> toolbar or <emph>Frame</emph> toolbar to open the <emph>Borders</emph> window." -msgstr "单击<emph>OLE 对象</emph>工具栏或<emph>框架</emph>工具栏上的<emph>边框</emph>图标可打开<emph>边框</emph>窗口。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>OLE 对象</emph>」工具栏或<emph>框架</emph>工具栏上的<emph>边框</emph>图标可打开「<emph>边框</emph>」窗口。" #: border_object.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1446,7 +1446,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3159176\n" "help.text" msgid "Click one of the predefined border styles. This replaces the current border style of the object with the selected style." -msgstr "单击预设边框样式之一。对象的当前边框样式将被选定的边框样式替代。" +msgstr "点击预设边框样式之一。对象的当前边框样式将被选中的边框样式替代。" #: border_object.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1470,7 +1470,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156344\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Format - (object name) – Borders</item>.<br/>Replace (object name) with the actual name of the object type you selected." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - (对象名称) – 边框</item>。<br/>将（将对象名称）替换为所选对象类型的实际名称。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - (对象名称) – 边框</item>」。<br/>将（将对象名称）替换为所选对象类型的实际名称。" #: border_object.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1478,7 +1478,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3148797\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>User-defined</emph> area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge." -msgstr "在<emph>用户定义</emph>区域中，选择要在通用版式中显示的边缘。单击预览中显示的边缘以切换边缘。" +msgstr "在<emph>用户定义</emph>区域中，选择要在通用版式中显示的边缘。点击预览中显示的边缘以切换边缘。" #: border_object.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1486,7 +1486,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3152933\n" "help.text" msgid "Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the <emph>Line</emph> area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style." -msgstr "在<emph>线条</emph>区域中，为选定的边框样式选择线条样式和颜色。这些设置将应用于选定边框样式所包括的全部边框线条。" +msgstr "在<emph>线条</emph>区域中，为选中的边框样式选择线条样式和颜色。这些设置将应用于选中边框样式所包括的全部边框线条。" #: border_object.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1510,7 +1510,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154908\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph> to apply the changes." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>以应用应用。" +msgstr "点击<emph>确定</emph>以应用应用。" #: border_page.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1542,7 +1542,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3148473\n" "help.text" msgid "In Writer, you define borders for <emph>page styles</emph>, not individual pages. All changes made to borders apply to all pages that use the same page style. Note that page style changes cannot be undone by the Undo function in $[officename]." -msgstr "在 Writer 中，您可以为<emph>页面样式</emph>定义边框，而不是为各个页面定义边框。对边框进行的所有修改将应用于使用相同页面样式的所有页面。请注意，$[officename] 中的“撤消”功能无法撤消页面样式的修改。" +msgstr "在 Writer 中，您可以为<emph>页面样式</emph>定义边框，而不是为各个页面定义边框。对边框进行的所有修改将应用于使用相同页面样式的所有页面。请注意，$[officename] 中的「撤消」功能无法撤消页面样式的修改。" #: border_page.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1558,7 +1558,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3148491\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Format - Page - Borders</emph>." -msgstr "选择 <emph>格式 - [页] - 边框</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>格式 - 页面 - 边框</emph>」。" #: border_page.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1590,7 +1590,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156023\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph> to apply the changes." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>以应用应用。" +msgstr "点击<emph>确定</emph>以应用应用。" #: border_page.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1606,7 +1606,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3148663\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Format - Page - Borders</emph>." -msgstr "选择 <emph>格式 - [页] - 边框</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>格式 - 页面 - 边框</emph>」。" #: border_page.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1614,7 +1614,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150541\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>User-defined</emph> area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge." -msgstr "在<emph>用户定义</emph>区域中，选择要在通用版式中显示的边缘。单击预览中显示的边缘以切换边缘。" +msgstr "在<emph>用户定义</emph>区域中，选择要在通用版式中显示的边缘。点击预览中显示的边缘以切换边缘。" #: border_page.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1646,7 +1646,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145606\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph> to apply the changes." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>以应用应用。" +msgstr "点击<emph>确定</emph>以应用应用。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1678,7 +1678,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1069368\n" "help.text" msgid "You can apply a variety of different cell borders to selected cells in a Writer table and to the whole table. Other objects in text documents can have user defined borders, too. For example, you can assign borders to page styles, to frames, and to inserted pictures or charts." -msgstr "您可以将各种不同的单元格边框应用于 Writer 表格中的选定单元格以及整个表格。文本文档中的其他对象也可以具有自定义边框。例如，可以将边框指定给页面样式、框架，以及插入的图片或图表。" +msgstr "您可以将各种不同的单元格边框应用于 Writer 表格中的选中单元格以及整个表格。文本文档中的其他对象也可以具有自定义边框。例如，可以将边框指定给页面样式、框架，以及插入的图片或图表。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1694,7 +1694,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id6129947\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Table - Properties</item>." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">表格 - 属性</item>。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">表格 - 属性</item>」。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1702,7 +1702,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id8141117\n" "help.text" msgid "In the dialog, click the <emph>Borders</emph> tab." -msgstr "在对话框中，单击<emph>边框</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "在对话框中，点击「<emph>边框</emph>」选项卡。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1710,7 +1710,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id6016418\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK." -msgstr "选择要应用的边框选项，然后单击“确定”。" +msgstr "选择要应用的边框选项，然后点击「确定」。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1758,7 +1758,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1076998\n" "help.text" msgid "One cell selected in a table that has more than one cells, or cursor inside a table with no cell selected" -msgstr "在包含多个单元格的表格中选定了一个单元格，或光标位于没有选定任何单元格的表格内" +msgstr "在包含多个单元格的表格中选中了一个单元格，或光标位于没有选中任何单元格的表格内" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1766,7 +1766,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id4240241\n" "help.text" msgid "<image id=\"img_id1058992\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_1.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.7791in\"><alt id=\"alt_id1058992\">one cell border</alt></image>" -msgstr "<image id=\"img_id1058992\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_1.png\" width=\"1.2709inch\" height=\"1.5937inch\"><alt id=\"alt_id1058992\">一个单元格边框</alt></image>" +msgstr "<image id=\"img_id1058992\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_1.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.7791in\"><alt id=\"alt_id1058992\">一个单元格边框</alt></image>" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1774,7 +1774,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id162053\n" "help.text" msgid "A one cell table, the cell is selected" -msgstr "只有一个单元格的表格，已选定该单元格。" +msgstr "已选中只有一个单元格的表格" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1782,7 +1782,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id5021820\n" "help.text" msgid "<image id=\"img_id7366557\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_2.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.7791in\"><alt id=\"alt_id7366557\">one selected cell border</alt></image>" -msgstr "<image id=\"img_id7366557\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_2.png\" width=\"1.2709inch\" height=\"1.6146inch\"><alt id=\"alt_id7366557\">一个选定单元格的边框</alt></image>" +msgstr "<image id=\"img_id7366557\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_2.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.7791in\"><alt id=\"alt_id7366557\">一个选中单元格的边框</alt></image>" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1790,7 +1790,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3549607\n" "help.text" msgid "Cells in a column selected" -msgstr "已选定的列中的单元格" +msgstr "已选中的列中的单元格" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1798,7 +1798,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id2544328\n" "help.text" msgid "<image id=\"img_id2298654\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_3.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.7791in\"><alt id=\"alt_id2298654\">column selected border</alt></image>" -msgstr "<image id=\"img_id2298654\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_3.png\" width=\"1.2709inch\" height=\"1.6252inch\"><alt id=\"alt_id2298654\">选定列的边框</alt></image>" +msgstr "<image id=\"img_id2298654\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_3.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.7791in\"><alt id=\"alt_id2298654\">选中列的边框</alt></image>" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1806,7 +1806,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1636402\n" "help.text" msgid "Cells in a row selected" -msgstr "已选定的行中的单元格" +msgstr "已选中的行中的单元格" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1814,7 +1814,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7450483\n" "help.text" msgid "<image id=\"img_id9033783\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_4.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.7791in\"><alt id=\"alt_id9033783\">row selected border</alt></image>" -msgstr "<image id=\"img_id9033783\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_4.png\" width=\"1.2709inch\" height=\"1.6043inch\"><alt id=\"alt_id9033783\">选定行的边框</alt></image>" +msgstr "<image id=\"img_id9033783\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_4.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.7791in\"><alt id=\"alt_id9033783\">选中行的边框</alt></image>" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1822,7 +1822,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id5741752\n" "help.text" msgid "A whole table of 2x2 or more cells selected" -msgstr "已选定整个表格的 2x2 或更多单元格" +msgstr "已选中整个表格的 2x2 或更多单元格" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1830,7 +1830,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id570085\n" "help.text" msgid "<image id=\"img_id4776757\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_5.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.7791in\"><alt id=\"alt_id4776757\">block selected border</alt></image>" -msgstr "<image id=\"img_id4776757\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_5.png\" width=\"1.2811inch\" height=\"1.6043inch\"><alt id=\"alt_id4776757\">选定块的边框</alt></image>" +msgstr "<image id=\"img_id4776757\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_5.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.7791in\"><alt id=\"alt_id4776757\">选中块的边框</alt></image>" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1846,7 +1846,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id626544\n" "help.text" msgid "Click one of the <emph>Default</emph> icons to set or reset multiple borders." -msgstr "单击任一<emph>默认</emph>图标，以设置或重设多个边框。" +msgstr "点击任一<emph>默认</emph>图标，以设置或重设多个边框。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1862,7 +1862,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1361735\n" "help.text" msgid "The dark lines inside an icon show the lines that will be set using the selected line style and color." -msgstr "图标内的黑色线条表示将使用选定的线型和颜色进行设置的线条。" +msgstr "图标内的黑色线条表示将使用选中的线型和颜色进行设置的线条。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1886,7 +1886,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id5528427\n" "help.text" msgid "Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose <emph>Format - Cells - Borders</emph>." -msgstr "选择一个大约由 8x8 个单元格组成的块，然后选择<emph>格式 – 单元格 – 边框</emph>。" +msgstr "选择一个大约由 8x8 个单元格组成的块，然后选择「<emph>格式 – 单元格 – 边框</emph>」。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1894,7 +1894,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id4194158\n" "help.text" msgid "<image id=\"img_id8221076\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_ca_5.png\" width=\"1.2209in\" height=\"0.2445in\"><alt id=\"alt_id8221076\">default icons for borders</alt></image>" -msgstr "<image id=\"img_id8221076\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_ca_5.png\" width=\"1.1354inch\" height=\"0.25inch\"><alt id=\"alt_id8221076\">边框的默认图标</alt></image>" +msgstr "<image id=\"img_id8221076\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_ca_5.png\" width=\"1.2209in\" height=\"0.2445in\"><alt id=\"alt_id8221076\">边框的默认图标</alt></image>" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1902,7 +1902,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7253028\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the left icon to clear all lines. This removes all outer borders and all inner lines." -msgstr "单击左侧的图标可以清除所有线条。此操作将删除所有外边框和所有内部线条。" +msgstr "点击左侧的图标可以清除所有线条。此操作将删除所有外边框和所有内部线条。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1910,7 +1910,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id9441206\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the second icon from the left to set an outer border and to remove all other lines." -msgstr "单击左侧第二个图标可以设置外边框及删除所有其他线条。" +msgstr "点击左侧第二个图标可以设置外边框及删除所有其他线条。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1918,7 +1918,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7276833\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the rightmost icon to set an outer border. The inner lines are not changed." -msgstr "单击最右侧的图标可以设置外边框。内部线条不会被修改。" +msgstr "点击最右侧的图标可以设置外边框。内部线条不会被修改。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1942,7 +1942,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1820734\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>User defined</emph> area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states." -msgstr "在<emph>自定义</emph>区域中，您可以通过单击来设置或删除单个线条。此预览显示了三种不同状态的线条。" +msgstr "在<emph>自定义</emph>区域中，您可以通过点击来设置或删除单个线条。此预览显示了三种不同状态的线条。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1950,7 +1950,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7093111\n" "help.text" msgid "Repeatedly click an edge or a corner to switch through the three different states." -msgstr "重复单击边或角可以在三种不同的状态之间进行切换。" +msgstr "重复点击边或角可以在三种不同的状态之间进行切换。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1990,7 +1990,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id6485793\n" "help.text" msgid "<image id=\"img_id1237525\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_6.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.2555in\"><alt id=\"alt_id1237525\">solid line for border</alt></image>" -msgstr "<image id=\"img_id1237525\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_6.png\" width=\"1.2709inch\" height=\"1.1354inch\"><alt id=\"alt_id1237525\">用于边框的实线</alt></image>" +msgstr "<image id=\"img_id1237525\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_6.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.2555in\"><alt id=\"alt_id1237525\">用于边框的实线</alt></image>" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -1998,7 +1998,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1454512\n" "help.text" msgid "A black line sets the corresponding line of the selected cells. The line is shown as a dotted line when you choose the 0.05 pt line style. Double lines are shown when you select a double line style." -msgstr "以黑色线条设置选定单元格的相应线条。。如果选择 0.05 pt 线条样式，此线条将显示为虚线。如果选择双线样式，将显示双线。" +msgstr "以黑色线条设置选中单元格的相应线条。。如果选择 0.05 pt 线条样式，此线条将显示为虚线。如果选择双线样式，将显示双线。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2014,7 +2014,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1239356\n" "help.text" msgid "<image id=\"img_id2688680\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_7.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.2555in\"><alt id=\"alt_id2688680\">gray line for border</alt></image>" -msgstr "<image id=\"img_id2688680\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_7.png\" width=\"1.2709inch\" height=\"1.1457inch\"><alt id=\"alt_id2688680\">用于边框的灰色线条</alt></image>" +msgstr "<image id=\"img_id2688680\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_7.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.2555in\"><alt id=\"alt_id2688680\">用于边框的灰色线条</alt></image>" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2022,7 +2022,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id9474166\n" "help.text" msgid "A gray line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will not be changed. No line will be set or removed at this position." -msgstr "如果选定单元格的相应线条不会被修改，将显示灰色线条。在此位置不会设置或删除任何线条。" +msgstr "如果选中单元格的相应线条不会被修改，将显示灰色线条。在此位置不会设置或删除任何线条。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2038,7 +2038,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1681875\n" "help.text" msgid "<image id=\"img_id7340617\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_8.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.2555in\"><alt id=\"alt_id7340617\">white line for border</alt></image>" -msgstr "<image id=\"img_id7340617\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_8.png\" width=\"1.2709inch\" height=\"1.1354inch\"><alt id=\"alt_id7340617\">用于边框的白色线条</alt></image>" +msgstr "<image id=\"img_id7340617\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_8.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.2555in\"><alt id=\"alt_id7340617\">用于边框的白色线条</alt></image>" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2046,7 +2046,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id2316660\n" "help.text" msgid "A white line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will be removed." -msgstr "如果选定单元格的相应线条将被删除，将显示白色线条。" +msgstr "如果选中单元格的相应线条将被删除，将显示白色线条。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2078,7 +2078,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7741325\n" "help.text" msgid "To set a lower border, click the lower edge repeatedly until you see a thick line." -msgstr "要设置下边框，请重复单击下边缘，直到显示一条粗线。" +msgstr "要设置下边框，请重复点击下边缘，直到显示一条粗线。" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2086,7 +2086,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id542313\n" "help.text" msgid "<image id=\"img_id4273506\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_6.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.2555in\"><alt id=\"alt_id4273506\">setting thick lower border</alt></image>" -msgstr "<image id=\"img_id4273506\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_6.png\" width=\"1.2709inch\" height=\"1.1354inch\"><alt id=\"alt_id4273506\">设置粗下边框</alt></image>" +msgstr "<image id=\"img_id4273506\" src=\"media/helpimg/border_wr_6.png\" width=\"1.4071in\" height=\"1.2555in\"><alt id=\"alt_id4273506\">设置粗下边框</alt></image>" #: borders.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2142,7 +2142,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149972\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in the document where you want to insert the calculation, and then press F2. If you are in a table cell, type an equals sign =." -msgstr "在文档中要插入计算的位置单击，然后按 F2 键。如果位于表格单元格中，则键入等号 (=)。" +msgstr "在文档中要插入计算的位置点击，然后按 F2 键。如果位于表格单元格中，则输入等号 (=)。" #: calculate.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2150,7 +2150,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155547\n" "help.text" msgid "Type the calculation that you want to insert, for example, <item type=\"literal\">=10000/12</item>, and then press Enter." -msgstr "键入要插入的计算，例如 <item type=\"literal\">=10000/12</item>，然后按 Enter 键。" +msgstr "输入要插入的计算，例如 <item type=\"literal\">=10000/12</item>，然后按 Enter 键。" #: calculate.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2158,7 +2158,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155565\n" "help.text" msgid "You can also click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Formula</item> icon on the <item type=\"menuitem\">Formula Bar</item>, and then choose a function for your formula." -msgstr "还可以单击<item type=\"menuitem\">公式栏</item>中的<item type=\"menuitem\">公式</item>图标，然后为公式选择一种功能。" +msgstr "还可以点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">公式栏</item>中的<item type=\"menuitem\">公式</item>」图标，然后为公式选择一种功能。" #: calculate.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2214,7 +2214,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155496\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Tools - Calculate</emph>, or press <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Plus Sign (+)." -msgstr "选择<emph>工具 - 计算</emph>，或者按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"> <caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline> <defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline> </switchinline>+加号键 (+)。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>工具 - 计算</emph>」，或者按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"> <caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline> <defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline> </switchinline>+加号键 (+)。" #: calculate_clipboard.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2222,7 +2222,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id5172582\n" "help.text" msgid "Place the cursor where you want to insert the result of the formula, and then choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Edit - Paste</item>, or press <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+V.<br/>The selected formula is replaced by the result." -msgstr "将光标置于要插入公式结果的位置，然后选择<item type=\"menuitem\">编辑 - 粘贴</item>，或者按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"> <caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline> <defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline> </switchinline>+V 键。" +msgstr "将光标置于要插入公式结果的位置，然后选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">编辑 - 粘贴</item>」，或者按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+V。<br/>选中的公式将被结果替换。" #: calculate_intable.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2262,7 +2262,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154203\n" "help.text" msgid "Type a number in each cell of the column, but leave the last cell in the column empty." -msgstr "在列的每个单元格中键入一个数字，但将列中的最后一个单元格保留为空。" +msgstr "在列的每个单元格中输入一个数字，但将列中的最后一个单元格保留为空。" #: calculate_intable.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2270,7 +2270,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154222\n" "help.text" msgid "Place the cursor in the last cell of the column, and then click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Sum</item> icon on the <item type=\"menuitem\">Table Bar</item>.<br/>The <item type=\"menuitem\">Formula Bar</item> appears with the entry \"=sum\"." -msgstr "将光标置于列的最后一个单元格中，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">表格栏</item>中的<item type=\"menuitem\">求和</item>图标。<br/>此时会出现带有条目“=sum”的<item type=\"menuitem\">公式栏</item>。" +msgstr "将光标置于列的最后一个单元格中，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">表格栏</item>中的<item type=\"menuitem\">求和</item>」图标。<br/>此时会出现带有条目「=sum」的<item type=\"menuitem\">公式栏</item>。" #: calculate_intable.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2278,7 +2278,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147775\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in the first cell of the series you want to sum up, drag to the final cell, and then release.<br/>$[officename] inserts a formula for calculating the sum of the values in the current column." -msgstr "在系列表格单元格的第一个单元格中单击，拖动到最后一个单元格，然后释放。<br/>$[officename] 插入一个公式，用于计算当前列中的值的和。" +msgstr "在系列表格单元格的第一个单元格中点击，拖动到最后一个单元格，然后释放。<br/>$[officename] 插入一个公式，用于计算当前列中的值的和。" #: calculate_intable.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2286,7 +2286,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150507\n" "help.text" msgid "Press Enter, or click <emph>Apply</emph> in the Formula bar. <br/>The sum of the values in the current column is entered in the cell." -msgstr "如果公式正确，请按 Enter 键，或者单击“公式编辑栏”中的<emph>应用</emph>。<br/>当前列中数值的总和将输入到该单元格中。" +msgstr "如果公式正确，请按 Enter 键，或者点击「公式编辑栏」中的<emph>应用</emph>。<br/>当前列中数值的总和将输入到该单元格中。" #: calculate_intable.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2342,7 +2342,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3152901\n" "help.text" msgid "For example, to calculate the mean value of three numbers, do the following:" -msgstr "例如，要计算三个数字的平均值，可以执行以下操作：" +msgstr "例如，要计算三个数字的平均值，可以执行以下操作:" #: calculate_intext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2350,7 +2350,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145078\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in the document where you want to insert the formula, and then press F2." -msgstr "在文档中要插入公式的位置单击，然后按 F2 键。" +msgstr "在文档中要插入公式的位置点击，然后按 F2 键。" #: calculate_intext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2358,7 +2358,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156382\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Formula</item> icon, and choose \"Mean\" from the Statistical Functions list." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">公式</item>图标，然后从统计函数列表中选择“平均值”。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">公式</item>」图标，然后从统计函数列表中选择「平均值」。" #: calculate_intext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2366,7 +2366,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149692\n" "help.text" msgid "Type the three numbers, separated by vertical slashes (|)." -msgstr "键入第三个数字，用一条竖线 (|) 分开。" +msgstr "输入第三个数字，用一条竖线 (|) 分开。" #: calculate_intext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2374,7 +2374,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149481\n" "help.text" msgid "Press <emph>Enter</emph>. The result is inserted as a field into the document." -msgstr "请按击回车键。在文本中您可看到求得的结果。结果会当作字段指令插入文档。" +msgstr "请按击<emph>回车</emph>键。结果将作为字段插入文档。" #: calculate_intext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2446,7 +2446,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155551\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Formula Bar</item>, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, <item type=\"literal\">=SUM</item>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">公式栏</item>中，输入您要执行的函数，例如 <item type=\"literal\">=SUM</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">公式栏</item>中，输入您要执行的函数，例如 <item type=\"literal\">=SUM</item>」。" #: calculate_intext2.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2454,7 +2454,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155577\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in a cell in the larger table that contains a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number." -msgstr "在较大表格中含有数字的单元格内单击，按加号 (+) 键，然后在含有数字的各个单元格内单击。" +msgstr "在较大表格中含有数字的单元格内点击，按加号 (+) 键，然后在含有数字的各个单元格内点击。" #: calculate_intext2.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2510,7 +2510,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147795\n" "help.text" msgid "Open a text document, insert two tables, and type numbers in a few cells in both tables." -msgstr "打开一个文本文档，插入两个表格，并在这两个表格的若干个单元格中键入数字。" +msgstr "打开一个文本文档，插入两个表格，并在这两个表格的若干个单元格中输入数字。" #: calculate_multitable.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2534,7 +2534,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147228\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Formula Bar</item>, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, <item type=\"literal\">=SUM</item>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">公式栏</item>中，输入您要执行的函数，例如 <item type=\"literal\">=SUM</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">公式栏</item>中，输入您要执行的函数，例如 <item type=\"literal\">=SUM</item>」。" #: calculate_multitable.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2542,7 +2542,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147254\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in a cell containing a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number." -msgstr "在含有数字的单元格中单击，按加号 (+)，然后在含有数字的不同单元格中单击。" +msgstr "在含有数字的单元格中点击，按加号 (+)，然后在含有数字的不同单元格中点击。" #: calculate_multitable.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2614,7 +2614,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3155541\n" "help.text" msgid "To define a caption proceed as follows:" -msgstr "要定义标题，请执行如下操作：" +msgstr "要定义标题，请执行如下操作:" #: captions.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2630,7 +2630,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155586\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Caption</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 标题</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 标题</emph>」。" #: captions.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2638,7 +2638,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147765\n" "help.text" msgid "Select the options that you want, and then click <item type=\"menuitem\">OK</item>. If you want, you can also enter different text in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Category</item> box, for example <item type=\"literal\">Figure</item>." -msgstr "选择所需的选项，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">确定</item>。如果需要，还可以在<item type=\"menuitem\">类别</item>框中输入其他文本，例如<item type=\"literal\">图</item>。" +msgstr "选择所需的选项，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">确定</item>」。如果需要，还可以在「<item type=\"menuitem\">类别</item>框中输入其他文本，例如<item type=\"literal\">图</item>」。" #: captions.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2654,7 +2654,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147271\n" "help.text" msgid "A caption is formatted with the paragraph style that matches the name of the caption category. For example, if you insert a \"Table\" caption, the \"Table\" paragraph style is applied to the caption text." -msgstr "标题的格式取自于标题类别名称对应的段落样式。如果插入“表格”标题，则标题文本将应用“表格”段落样式。" +msgstr "标题的格式取自于标题类别名称对应的段落样式。如果插入「表格」标题，则标题文本将应用「表格」段落样式。" #: captions.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2662,7 +2662,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145671\n" "help.text" msgid "$[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, frame, or table. Choose <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption</emph>." -msgstr "插入对象、图形、框架和表格时，$[officename] 会自动添加标题。选择<emph><switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">%PRODUCTNAME - 首选项</caseinline><defaultinline>工具 - 选项</defaultinline></switchinline> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - 自动插入标题</emph>。" +msgstr "插入对象、图形、框架和表格时，$[officename] 会自动添加标题。选择「<switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - 偏好设置</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>工具 - 选项</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - 自动插入标题</emph>」。" #: captions_numbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2718,7 +2718,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150503\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Caption</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 标题</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 标题</emph>」。" #: captions_numbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2734,7 +2734,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153166\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Options</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>选项</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>选项</emph>」。" #: captions_numbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2758,7 +2758,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155586\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>Caption</emph> dialog, click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "在<emph>标题</emph>对话框中，单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "在「<emph>标题</emph>对话框中，点击<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: captions_numbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2774,7 +2774,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145567\n" "help.text" msgid "<link href=\"text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp\" name=\"Caption dialog\">AutoCaption dialog</link>" -msgstr "<link name=\"标题对话框\" href=\"text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp\">自动插入标题对话框</link>" +msgstr "<link href=\"text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp\" name=\"Caption dialog\">自动插入标题对话框</link>" #: captions_numbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2798,7 +2798,7 @@ msgctxt "" "bm_id3146875\n" "help.text" msgid "<bookmark_value>headers; inserting</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>footers; inserting</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>page styles; changing from selection</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>new page styles from selection</bookmark_value>" -msgstr "<bookmark_value>页眉; 插入</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>页脚; 插入</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>页面样式; 从选定内容中更改</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>选定内容中的新页面样式</bookmark_value>" +msgstr "<bookmark_value>页眉; 插入</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>页脚; 插入</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>页面样式; 从选中内容中更改</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>选中内容中的新页面样式</bookmark_value>" #: change_header.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2838,7 +2838,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150532\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>New Style from Selection</emph> icon and select <emph>New Styles from Selection</emph> from the submenu." -msgstr "单击<emph>选中的新样式</emph>图标并从子菜单中选择<emph>选中的新样式</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>选中的新样式</emph>」图标并从子菜单中选择「<emph>选中的新样式</emph>」。" #: change_header.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2846,7 +2846,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153153\n" "help.text" msgid "Type a name for the page in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Style name</item> box, and then click <item type=\"menuitem\">OK</item>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">样式名称</item>框中键入页面的名称，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">确定</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">样式名称</item>框中输入页面的名称，然后点击<item type=\"menuitem\">确定</item>」。" #: change_header.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2870,7 +2870,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155572\n" "help.text" msgid "Type the text that you want in the header. Position the cursor into the main text area outside of the header." -msgstr "在页眉中键入所需的文字。将光标放置在页眉以外的主文本区域。" +msgstr "在页眉中输入所需的文字。将光标放置在页眉以外的主文本区域。" #: change_header.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2878,7 +2878,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155592\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 手动分页</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 手动分页</emph>」。" #: change_header.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2886,7 +2886,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147771\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Type</item> area, select <item type=\"menuitem\">Page break</item> and then select “Default” from the <item type=\"menuitem\">Style</item> box." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>区域中，选择<item type=\"menuitem\">换页符</item>，然后从<item type=\"menuitem\">样式</item>框中选择“默认值”。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>区域中，选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">换页符</item>」，然后从<item type=\"menuitem\">样式</item>」框中选择「默认值」。" #: change_header.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2926,7 +2926,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155605\n" "help.text" msgid "You can modify the heading hierarchy or assign a level in the hierarchy to a custom paragraph style. You can also add chapter and section numbering to heading paragraph styles. By default, the \"Heading 1\" paragraph style is at the top of the chapter hierarchy." -msgstr "您可以更改标题对应的层级，或者为段落样式指定层级结构。您还可以为“标题 N”段落样式的段落添加章节编号。在默认情况下，“标题 1”段落样式位于大纲层级的顶层。" +msgstr "您可以更改标题对应的层级，或者为段落样式指定层级结构。您还可以为「标题 N」段落样式的段落添加章节编号。在默认情况下，「标题 1」段落样式位于大纲层级的顶层。" #: chapter_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2934,7 +2934,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3155626\n" "help.text" msgid "To Add Automatic Numbering to a Heading Style" -msgstr "向标题样式中添加自动编号：" +msgstr "向标题样式中添加自动编号" #: chapter_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2950,7 +2950,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155891\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Paragraph Style</item> box, select the heading style that you want to add chapter numbers to." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">段落样式</item>框中，选择要添加章节号的标题样式。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">段落样式</item>」框中，选择要添加章节号的标题样式。" #: chapter_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2958,7 +2958,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150513\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Numbers</item> box, select the numbering style that you want to use, and then click <item type=\"menuitem\">OK</item>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">编号</item>框中，选择要使用的编号样式，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">确定</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">编号</item>框中，选择要使用的编号样式，然后点击<item type=\"menuitem\">确定</item>」。" #: chapter_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2974,7 +2974,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN107D5\n" "help.text" msgid "Click at the beginning of the text in the heading paragraph, after the number." -msgstr "在标题段落中的文本开始处，在编号后单击。" +msgstr "在标题段落中的文本开始处，在编号后点击。" #: chapter_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -2990,7 +2990,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3155552\n" "help.text" msgid "To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Heading" -msgstr "将自定义段落样式用作标题：" +msgstr "将自定义段落样式用作标题" #: chapter_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3006,7 +3006,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147758\n" "help.text" msgid "Select the custom style in the <emph>Paragraph Style</emph> box." -msgstr "在<emph>段落样式</emph>框中选择自定义样式。" +msgstr "在「<emph>段落样式</emph>」框中选择自定义样式。" #: chapter_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3014,7 +3014,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147782\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Level</item> list." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">级别</item>列表中要指定给自定义段落样式的标题级别。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">级别</item>」列表中要指定给自定义段落样式的标题级别。" #: chapter_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3022,7 +3022,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147808\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: conditional_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3070,7 +3070,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3153175\n" "help.text" msgid "To Define a Conditional Variable" -msgstr "定义有条件的变量：" +msgstr "定义有条件的变量" #: conditional_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3086,7 +3086,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155566\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert - Field - More Fields</item>, and then click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Variables</item> tab." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 字段 - 其他</item>，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">变量</item>选项卡。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 字段 - 其他</item>」，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">变量</item>」选项卡。" #: conditional_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3094,7 +3094,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147759\n" "help.text" msgid "Click \"Set variable\" in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Type</item> list." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>列表中的“设置变量”。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>」列表中的「设置变量」。" #: conditional_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3102,7 +3102,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147784\n" "help.text" msgid "Type a name for the variable in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Name</item> box, for example <item type=\"literal\">Reminder</item>." -msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">名称</item>」框中键入变量的名称，例如「<item type=\"literal\">提醒</item>」。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">名称</item>」框中输入变量的名称，例如「<item type=\"literal\">提醒</item>」。" #: conditional_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3110,7 +3110,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147810\n" "help.text" msgid "Click \"Text\" in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Format</item> list." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">格式</item>列表中的“文本”。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式</item>」列表中的「文本」。" #: conditional_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3118,7 +3118,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7748344\n" "help.text" msgid "Enter <item type=\"literal\">1</item> in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Value</item> box, and then click <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert</item>.<br/>The Format list now displays a \"General\" format." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">值</item>框中输入 <item type=\"literal\">1</item>，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>。<br/>现在“格式”列表会显示“常规”格式。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"literal\"></item><item type=\"menuitem\">值</item>」框中输入「1」，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>」。<br/>现在「格式」列表会显示「常规」格式。" #: conditional_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3150,7 +3150,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3151212\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert - Field - More Fields</item>, and then click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Functions</item> tab." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 字段 - 其他</item>，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">功能</item>选项卡。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 字段 - 其他</item>」，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">功能</item>」选项卡。" #: conditional_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3158,7 +3158,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3151250\n" "help.text" msgid "Click \"Conditional text\" in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Type</item> list." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>列表中的“有条件的文字”。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>」列表中的「有条件的文字」。" #: conditional_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3182,7 +3182,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150446\n" "help.text" msgid "Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the <emph>Then</emph> box. There is almost no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. You can paste a paragraph into this box." -msgstr "在<emph>则</emph>框中键入满足条件时要显示的文字。可以输入任意长度的文本。也可以将段落粘贴到该框中。" +msgstr "在「<emph>则</emph>」框中输入满足条件时要显示的文字。可以输入任意长度的文本。也可以将段落粘贴到该框中。" #: conditional_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3190,7 +3190,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150473\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>插入</emph>，然后单击<emph>关闭</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>插入</emph>」，然后点击「<emph>关闭</emph>」。" #: conditional_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3214,7 +3214,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155110\n" "help.text" msgid "Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose <emph>Edit - Fields</emph>." -msgstr "将光标置于您在此示例第一部分中定义的字段之前，然后选择<emph>编辑 - 字段</emph>。" +msgstr "将光标置于您在此示例第一部分中定义的字段之前，然后选择「<emph>编辑 - 字段</emph>」。" #: conditional_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3222,7 +3222,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155136\n" "help.text" msgid "Replace the number in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Value</item> box with 3, and then click <item type=\"menuitem\">Close</item>." -msgstr "将<item type=\"menuitem\">值</item>框中的编号替换为 3，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">关闭</item>。" +msgstr "将<item type=\"menuitem\">值</item>框中的编号替换为 3，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">关闭</item>」。" #: conditional_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3286,7 +3286,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150513\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert - Field - Page Count</item>, and then enter a space." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 字段 - 页数</item>，然后输入一个空格。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 字段 - 页数</item>」，然后输入一个空格。" #: conditional_text2.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3294,7 +3294,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150537\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert - Field - More Fields</item>, and then click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Functions</item> tab." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 字段 - 其他</item>，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">功能</item>选项卡。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 字段 - 其他</item>」，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">功能</item>」选项卡。" #: conditional_text2.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3302,7 +3302,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153166\n" "help.text" msgid "Click \"Conditional text\" in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Type</item> list." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>列表中的“有条件的文字”。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>」列表中的「有条件的文字」。" #: conditional_text2.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3310,7 +3310,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145256\n" "help.text" msgid "Type <item type=\"literal\">Page > 1</item> in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Condition</item> box." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">条件</item>框中键入 <item type=\"literal\">Page > 1</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"literal\"></item><item type=\"menuitem\">条件</item>」框中输入「Page > 1」。" #: conditional_text2.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3318,7 +3318,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145280\n" "help.text" msgid "Type <item type=\"literal\">Pages</item> in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Then</item> box." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">就</item>框中键入 <item type=\"literal\">Pages</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"literal\"></item><item type=\"menuitem\">就</item>」框中输入「Pages」。" #: conditional_text2.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3326,7 +3326,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145305\n" "help.text" msgid "Type <item type=\"literal\">Page</item> in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Else</item> box." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">其他</item>框中键入 <item type=\"literal\">Page</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"literal\"></item><item type=\"menuitem\">否则</item>」框中输入「Page」。" #: conditional_text2.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3334,7 +3334,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155535\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>插入</emph>，然后单击<emph>关闭</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>插入</emph>」，然后点击「<emph>关闭</emph>」。" #: delete_from_dict.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3366,7 +3366,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153417\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - Language Settings - Writing Aids</emph>." -msgstr "请选择<emph><switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">%PRODUCTNAME - 首选项</caseinline><defaultinline>工具 - 选项</defaultinline></switchinline> - 语言设置 - 语言规则</emph>。" +msgstr "请选择「<switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - 偏好设置</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>工具 - 选项</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - 语言设置 - 语言规则</emph>」。" #: delete_from_dict.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3374,7 +3374,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3151391\n" "help.text" msgid "Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit in the <item type=\"menuitem\">User-defined</item> list, and then click <item type=\"menuitem\">Edit</item>." -msgstr "选择要在<item type=\"menuitem\">用户定义</item>列表中编辑的用户定义的字典，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">编辑</item>。" +msgstr "选择要在「<item type=\"menuitem\">用户定义</item>列表中编辑的用户定义的字典，然后点击<item type=\"menuitem\">编辑</item>」。" #: delete_from_dict.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3382,7 +3382,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154233\n" "help.text" msgid "Select the word that you want to delete in the <emph>Word</emph> list, and then click <emph>Delete</emph>." -msgstr "在<emph>字</emph>列表中选择要删除的字，然后单击<emph>删除</emph>。" +msgstr "在「<emph>字</emph>列表中选择要删除的字，然后点击<emph>删除</emph>」。" #: dragdroptext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3422,7 +3422,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155606\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: dragdroptext.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3470,7 +3470,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154265\n" "help.text" msgid "<image id=\"img_id3155876\" src=\"cmd/sc_designerdialog.png\" width=\"0.473cm\" height=\"0.473cm\"><alt id=\"alt_id3155876\">Icon</alt></image>" -msgstr "<image id=\"img_id3155876\" src=\"cmd/sc_designerdialog.png\" width=\"0.222inch\" height=\"0.222inch\"><alt id=\"alt_id3155876\">图标</alt></image>" +msgstr "<image id=\"img_id3155876\" src=\"cmd/sc_designerdialog.png\" width=\"0.473cm\" height=\"0.473cm\"><alt id=\"alt_id3155876\">图标</alt></image>" #: even_odd_sdw.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3502,7 +3502,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153153\n" "help.text" msgid "In the list of page styles, right-click \"Left Page\" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>." -msgstr "在“页面样式”列表中的“左页”上单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>修改</emph>。" +msgstr "在「页面样式」列表中的「左页」上点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>修改</emph>」。" #: even_odd_sdw.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3510,7 +3510,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153179\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab." -msgstr "单击<emph>管理器</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>管理器</emph>」选项卡。" #: even_odd_sdw.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3518,7 +3518,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145267\n" "help.text" msgid "Select \"Right Page\" in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, and then click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "在<emph>下一个样式</emph>框中选择“右页”，然后单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "在「<emph>下一个样式</emph>框中选择「右页」，然后点击<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: even_odd_sdw.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3526,7 +3526,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145299\n" "help.text" msgid "In the list of page styles, right-click \"Right Page\" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>." -msgstr "在“页面样式”列表中的“右页”上单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>修改</emph>。" +msgstr "在「页面样式」列表中的「右页」上点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>修改</emph>」。" #: even_odd_sdw.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3534,7 +3534,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155529\n" "help.text" msgid "Select \"Left Page\" in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, and then click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "在<emph>下一个样式</emph>框中选择“左页”，然后单击 <emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "在「<emph>下一个样式</emph>框中选择「左页」，然后点击 <emph>确定</emph>」。" #: even_odd_sdw.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3566,7 +3566,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147254\n" "help.text" msgid "If you do not want to have a header or a footer on the title page of your document, apply the \"First Page\" style to the title page." -msgstr "如果不希望在文档的标题页中使用页眉或页脚，请对标题页面应用“首页”样式。" +msgstr "如果不希望在文档的标题页中使用页眉或页脚，请对标题页面应用「首页」样式。" #: even_odd_sdw.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3590,7 +3590,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7594225\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph><switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">%PRODUCTNAME - 首选项</caseinline><defaultinline>工具 - 选项</defaultinline></switchinline> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - 打印</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - 偏好设置</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>工具 - 选项</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - 打印</emph>」。" #: even_odd_sdw.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3598,7 +3598,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id8147221\n" "help.text" msgid "Remove the check mark from <emph>Print automatically inserted blank pages</emph>." -msgstr "从<emph>打印自动插入的空白页</emph>中删除复选标记。" +msgstr "从「<emph>打印自动插入的空白页</emph>」中删除复选标记。" #: even_odd_sdw.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3646,7 +3646,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155608\n" "help.text" msgid "Select the field and choose <emph>Edit - Cut</emph>." -msgstr "选择字段并选择<emph>编辑 - 剪切</emph>。" +msgstr "选择字段并选择「<emph>编辑 - 剪切</emph>」。" #: field_convert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3654,7 +3654,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154238\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Edit - Paste Special</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>编辑 - 选择性粘贴</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>编辑 - 选择性粘贴</emph>」。" #: field_convert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3662,7 +3662,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154262\n" "help.text" msgid "Click \"Unformatted text\" in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Selection</item> list, and then click <item type=\"menuitem\">OK</item>." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">选择</item>列表中的“未格式化的文本”，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">确定</item>。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">选择</item>列表中的「未格式化的文本」，然后点击<item type=\"menuitem\">确定</item>」。" #: field_convert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3758,7 +3758,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155533\n" "help.text" msgid "The following field types execute an action when you click the field:" -msgstr "单击以下类型的字段时，会执行相应的操作：" +msgstr "点击以下类型的字段时，会执行相应的操作:" #: fields.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3854,7 +3854,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155963\n" "help.text" msgid "To update all of the fields in a document, press F9, or choose <emph>Edit - Select All</emph>, and then press F9." -msgstr "要更新文档中的所有字段，请按 F9 键，或者选择<emph>编辑 - 全选</emph>，然后按 F9 键。" +msgstr "要更新文档中的所有字段，请按 F9 键，或者选择「<emph>编辑 - 全选</emph>」，然后按 F9 键。" #: fields.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3910,7 +3910,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147679\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Field - More Fields</emph> and click the <emph>Document</emph> tab." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 字段 - 其他</emph>，单击<emph>文档</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 字段 - 其他</emph>」，点击「<emph>文档</emph>」选项卡。" #: fields_date.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3918,7 +3918,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153415\n" "help.text" msgid "Click “Date” in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Type</item> list and do one of the following:" -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>列表中的“日期”，然后执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>」列表中的「日期」，然后执行以下操作之一:" #: fields_date.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3926,7 +3926,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155602\n" "help.text" msgid "To insert the date as a field that updates each time you open the document, click ”Date” in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Select</item> list." -msgstr "要插入日期作为每次打开文档时更新的字段，请单击<item type=\"menuitem\">选择</item>列表中的“日期”。" +msgstr "要插入日期作为每次打开文档时更新的字段，请点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">选择</item>」列表中的「日期」。" #: fields_date.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3934,7 +3934,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154241\n" "help.text" msgid "To insert the date as a field that does not update, click “Date (fixed)” in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Select</item> list." -msgstr "要插入日期作为不更新的字段，请单击<item type=\"menuitem\">选择</item>列表中的“日期(固定)”。" +msgstr "要插入日期作为不更新的字段，请点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">选择</item>」列表中的「日期(固定)」。" #: fields_enter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3966,7 +3966,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153409\n" "help.text" msgid "An input field is a variable that you can click in a document to open a dialog where you can edit the variable." -msgstr "输入字段是一个变量，在文档中单击它可以打开一个对话框，以便编辑此变量。" +msgstr "输入字段是一个变量，在文档中点击它可以打开一个对话框，以便编辑此变量。" #: fields_enter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3974,7 +3974,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145776\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert - Field - More Fields</item> and click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Functions</item> tab." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 字段 - 其他</item>，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">功能</item>选项卡。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 字段 - 其他</item>」，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">功能</item>」选项卡。" #: fields_enter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3982,7 +3982,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155620\n" "help.text" msgid "Click “Input field”in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Type</item> list." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>列表中的“输入字段”。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>」列表中的「输入字段」。" #: fields_enter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3990,7 +3990,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154257\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert</item> and type the text for the variable." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>，然后键入变量的文本。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>」，然后输入变量的文本。" #: fields_enter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -3998,7 +3998,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155888\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: fields_enter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4038,7 +4038,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154239\n" "help.text" msgid "You can access and compare some user data from conditions or fields. For example, you can compare user data with the following operators:" -msgstr "可以使用条件或字段来访问和比较某些用户数据。例如，可以通过以下运算符比较用户数据：" +msgstr "可以使用条件或字段来访问和比较某些用户数据。例如，可以通过以下运算符比较用户数据:" #: fields_userdata.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4110,7 +4110,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145273\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 区域</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 区域</emph>」。" #: fields_userdata.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4126,7 +4126,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155533\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>With Condition</emph> box, type <emph>user_lastname == \"Doe\"</emph>, where \"Doe\" is the last name of the user that you want to hide the text from." -msgstr "在<emph>带条件</emph>框中，键入<emph>user_lastname == \"Doe\"</emph>，其中 \"Doe\" 是要隐藏其文字的用户的姓氏。" +msgstr "在「<emph>带条件</emph>框中，输入<emph>user_lastname == \"Doe\"</emph>」，其中 \"Doe\" 是要隐藏其文字的用户的姓氏。" #: fields_userdata.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4134,7 +4134,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155573\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then save the document." -msgstr "单击<emph>插入</emph>，然后保存该文档。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>插入</emph>」，然后保存该文档。" #: fields_userdata.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4142,7 +4142,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147760\n" "help.text" msgid "The name of the hidden section can still be seen in the Navigator." -msgstr "在“导航”中仍然可以看到隐藏区域的名称。" +msgstr "在「导航」中仍然可以看到隐藏区域的名称。" #: fields_userdata.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4150,7 +4150,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147777\n" "help.text" msgid "The following table is a list of the user variables that you can access when defining a condition or a field:" -msgstr "下表列出了定义条件或字段时可以使用的用户变量：" +msgstr "下表列出了定义条件或字段时可以使用的用户变量:" #: fields_userdata.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4430,7 +4430,7 @@ msgctxt "" "bm_id1163670\n" "help.text" msgid "<bookmark_value>finding; text/text formats/styles/objects</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>replacing; text and text formats</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>styles;finding</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>searching, see also finding</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>text formats; finding</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>formats; finding and replacing</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>searching; formats</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>objects;finding by Navigator</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>Asian languages;search options</bookmark_value>" -msgstr "<bookmark_value>查找; 文本/文本格式/样式/对象</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>替换; 文本和文本格式</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>样式;查找</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>搜索, 另请参阅“查找”</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>文本格式; 查找</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>格式; 查找和替换</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>搜索; 格式</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>对象;通过浏览器查找</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>亚洲语言;搜索选项</bookmark_value>" +msgstr "<bookmark_value>查找; 文本/文本格式/样式/对象</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>替换; 文本和文本格式</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>样式;查找</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>搜索, 另请参阅「查找」</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>文本格式; 查找</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>格式; 查找和替换</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>搜索; 格式</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>对象;通过浏览器查找</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>亚洲语言;搜索选项</bookmark_value>" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4454,7 +4454,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id6226081\n" "help.text" msgid "The Find & Replace dialog" -msgstr "“查找和替换”对话框" +msgstr "「查找和替换」对话框" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4462,7 +4462,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id6702780\n" "help.text" msgid "To find text within the whole document, open the Find & Replace dialog without any active text selection. If you want to search only a part of your document, first select that part of text, then open the Find & Replace dialog." -msgstr "要在整个文档中查找文本，请打开“查找和替换”对话框，而无需选择任何活动文本。如果要仅查找文档的一部分，请先选择该文本部分，然后打开“查找和替换”对话框。" +msgstr "要在整个文档中查找文本，请打开「查找和替换」对话框，而无需选择任何活动文本。如果要仅查找文档的一部分，请先选择该文本部分，然后打开「查找和替换」对话框。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4478,7 +4478,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id6957304\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Edit - Find & Replace</emph> to open the Find & Replace dialog." -msgstr "选择<emph>编辑 - 查找和替换</emph>以打开“查找和替换”对话框。" +msgstr "选择<emph>编辑 - 查找和替换</emph>以打开「查找和替换」对话框。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4494,7 +4494,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id5684072\n" "help.text" msgid "Either click <emph>Find Next</emph> or <emph>Find All</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>查找下一个</emph>或<emph>查找全部</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>查找下一个</emph>」或<emph>查找全部</emph>。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4502,7 +4502,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id4377269\n" "help.text" msgid "When you click <emph>Find Next</emph>, Writer will show you the next text that is equal to your entry. You can watch and edit the text, then click <emph>Find Next</emph> again to advance to the next found text." -msgstr "当单击<emph>查找下一个</emph>时，Writer 将显示下一个等于输入内容的文本。您可以查看和编辑文本，然后再次单击<emph>查找下一个</emph>以前进到下一个找到的文本。" +msgstr "当点击「<emph>查找下一个</emph>」时，Writer 将显示下一个等于输入内容的文本。您可以查看和编辑文本，然后再次点击<emph>查找下一个</emph>以前进到下一个找到的文本。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4526,7 +4526,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id9359416\n" "help.text" msgid "When you click <item type=\"menuitem\">Find All</item>, Writer selects all text that is equal to your entry. Now you can for example set all found text to bold, or apply a character style to all at once." -msgstr "当单击<emph>查找全部</emph>时，Writer 将选择与输入内容相同的所有文本。例如，您现在可以将所有找到的文本设置为粗体，或者同时将字符样式应用于所有文本。" +msgstr "当点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">查找全部</item>」时，Writer 将选择与输入内容相同的所有文本。例如，您现在可以将所有找到的文本设置为粗体，或者同时将字符样式应用于所有文本。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4542,7 +4542,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1780755\n" "help.text" msgid "Unlike searching text, replacing text cannot be restricted to the current selection only." -msgstr "与查找文本不同，无法将文本替换操作限制为仅替换当前选定内容。" +msgstr "与查找文本不同，无法将文本替换操作限制为仅替换当前选中内容。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4550,7 +4550,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id2467421\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog." -msgstr "选择“编辑 - 查找和替换”以打开“查找和替换”对话框。" +msgstr "选择「编辑 - 查找和替换」以打开「查找和替换」对话框。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4574,7 +4574,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id24109\n" "help.text" msgid "Either click <emph>Replace</emph> or <emph>Replace All</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>替换</emph>或<emph>全部替换</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>替换</emph>」或<emph>全部替换</emph>。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4590,7 +4590,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7540818\n" "help.text" msgid "When you click <emph>Replace All</emph>, Writer replaces all text that matches your entry." -msgstr "单击<emph>全部替换</emph>时，Writer 将替换与输入内容匹配的所有文本。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>全部替换</emph>」时，Writer 将替换与输入内容匹配的所有文本。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4606,7 +4606,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id8413953\n" "help.text" msgid "You want to find all text in your document to which a certain Paragraph Style is assigned, for example the \"Heading 2\" style." -msgstr "您需要在文档中查找指定了某种段落样式的所有文本，例如“标题 2”样式。" +msgstr "您需要在文档中查找指定了某种段落样式的所有文本，例如「标题 2」样式。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4614,7 +4614,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id2696920\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog." -msgstr "选择“编辑 - 查找和替换”以打开“查找和替换”对话框。" +msgstr "选择「编辑 - 查找和替换」以打开「查找和替换」对话框。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4638,7 +4638,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id679342\n" "help.text" msgid "Select the style to search for, then click <emph>Find Next</emph> or <emph>Find All</emph>." -msgstr "选择要查找的样式，然后单击<emph>查找下一个</emph>或<emph>查找全部</emph>。" +msgstr "选择要查找的样式，然后点击「<emph>查找下一个</emph>」或<emph>查找全部</emph>。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4670,7 +4670,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id2448805\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog." -msgstr "选择“编辑 - 查找和替换”以打开“查找和替换”对话框。" +msgstr "选择「编辑 - 查找和替换」以打开「查找和替换」对话框。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4678,7 +4678,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id4542985\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>More Options</emph> to expand the dialog." -msgstr "单击<emph>更多选项</emph>以展开对话框。" +msgstr "点击<emph>更多选项</emph>以展开对话框。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4686,7 +4686,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id4679403\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Format</emph> button." -msgstr "单击<emph>格式</emph>按钮。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>格式</emph>」按钮。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4694,7 +4694,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7783745\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Find Next</emph> or <emph>Find All</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>查找下一个</emph>或<emph>查找全部</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>查找下一个</emph>」或<emph>查找全部</emph>。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4718,7 +4718,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id8533280\n" "help.text" msgid "Check the <emph>Similarity search</emph> option and optionally click the <emph>Similarities</emph> button to change the settings. (Setting all three numbers to 1 works fine for English text.)" -msgstr "选中<emph>类似查找</emph>选项，并且可以有选择地单击 <emph>...</emph> 按钮来修改这些设置。（对于英文文本，将所有三个数字设置为 1 可获得较好效果。）" +msgstr "选中<emph>类似查找</emph>选项，并且可以有选择地点击「<emph>...</emph>」按钮来修改这些设置。（对于英文文本，将所有三个数字设置为 1 可获得较好效果。）" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4726,7 +4726,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id4646748\n" "help.text" msgid "When you have enabled Asian language support under <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - Language Settings - Languages</emph>, the Find & Replace dialog offers options to search Asian text." -msgstr "在<emph><switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">%PRODUCTNAME - 首选项</caseinline><defaultinline>工具 - 选项</defaultinline></switchinline> - 语言设置 - 语言</emph>下面启用了亚洲语言支持时，“查找和替换”对话框将提供查找亚洲文本的选项。" +msgstr "在「<switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - 偏好设置</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>工具 - 选项</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - 语言设置 - 语言</emph>」下面启用了亚洲语言支持时，「查找和替换」对话框将提供查找亚洲文本的选项。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4742,7 +4742,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id9934385\n" "help.text" msgid "The Navigator is the main tool for finding and selecting objects. You can also use the Navigator to move and arrange chapters, providing an outline view to your document." -msgstr "“导航”是用于查找和选择对象的主要工具。也可以使用“导航”来移动和排列章节，从而提供文档的大纲视图。" +msgstr "「导航」是用于查找和选择对象的主要工具。也可以使用「导航」来移动和排列章节，从而提供文档的大纲视图。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4750,7 +4750,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id4159062\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>View - Navigator</emph> to open the Navigator window." -msgstr "选择 <emph>查看 - 导航</emph> 打开“导航”窗口。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>查看 - 导航</emph>」打开「导航」窗口。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4758,7 +4758,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7421796\n" "help.text" msgid "Use the Navigator for inserting objects, links and references within the same document or from other open documents. See the <link href=\"text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp\">Navigator</link> guide for more information." -msgstr "使用“导航”在相同文档或其他打开的文档中插入对象、链接和引用。有关详细信息，请参阅<link href=\"text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp\">导航</link>向导。" +msgstr "使用「导航」在相同文档或其他打开的文档中插入对象、链接和引用。有关详细信息，请参阅<link href=\"text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp\">导航</link>向导。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4766,7 +4766,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id6417432\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the icon with the blue circle at the bottom right part of your document to open the small <emph>Navigation</emph> window." -msgstr "单击位于文档右下角部分带有蓝色圆圈的图标以打开小<emph>导航</emph>窗口。" +msgstr "点击位于文档右下角部分带有蓝色圆圈的图标以打开小<emph>导航</emph>窗口。" #: finding.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4774,7 +4774,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id4639728\n" "help.text" msgid "Use the small Navigation window to quickly jump to the next object or find the next text in your document." -msgstr "使用小“导航”窗口以快速跳到下一个对象，或在文档中查找下一个文本。" +msgstr "使用小「导航」窗口以快速跳到下一个对象，或在文档中查找下一个文本。" #: footer_nextpage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4830,7 +4830,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147109\n" "help.text" msgid "Place the cursor in the footer and choose <emph>Insert - Field - More Fields</emph>." -msgstr "将光标置于页脚中，并选择<emph>插入 - 字段 - 其他</emph>。" +msgstr "将光标置于页脚中，并选择「<emph>插入 - 字段 - 其他</emph>」。" #: footer_nextpage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4838,7 +4838,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147134\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>Fields</emph> dialog, click the <emph>Document</emph> tab." -msgstr "在<emph>字段</emph> 对话框中，单击<emph>文档</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "在「<emph>字段</emph> 对话框中，点击<emph>文档</emph>」选项卡。" #: footer_nextpage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4846,7 +4846,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150955\n" "help.text" msgid "Click 'Page' in the <emph>Type</emph> list and 'Next page' in the <emph>Select</emph> list." -msgstr "在<emph>类型</emph>列表中单击“页面”，在<emph>选择</emph>列表中单击“下一页”。" +msgstr "在「<emph>类型</emph>」列表中点击「页面」，在「<emph>选择</emph>」列表中点击「下一页」。" #: footer_nextpage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4854,7 +4854,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150517\n" "help.text" msgid "Click a numbering style in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Format</item> list." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">格式</item>列表中的编号样式。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式</item>」列表中的编号样式。" #: footer_nextpage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4862,7 +4862,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150537\n" "help.text" msgid "If you select 'Text' in the <emph>Format</emph> list, only the text that you enter in the <emph>Value</emph> box is displayed in the field." -msgstr "如果在<emph>格式</emph>列表中选择了“文字”，则字段中仅显示在<emph>数值</emph>框中输入的文字。" +msgstr "如果在「<emph>格式</emph>」列表中选择了「文字」，则字段中仅显示在「<emph>数值</emph>」框中输入的文字。" #: footer_nextpage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4870,7 +4870,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150727\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Insert</emph> to insert the field with the page number." -msgstr "单击<emph>插入</emph>以插入带有页码的字段。" +msgstr "点击<emph>插入</emph>以插入带有页码的字段。" #: footer_pagenumber.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4902,7 +4902,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id8230842\n" "help.text" msgid "You can easily insert a page number field in the footer of your document. You can also add a page count to the footer, for example, in the form \"Page 9 of 12\"" -msgstr "您可以轻松将页码字段插入文档的页脚。还可以将页数添加到页脚，例如，格式为“Page 9 of 12”" +msgstr "您可以轻松将页码字段插入文档的页脚。还可以将页数添加到页脚，例如，格式为「Page 9 of 12」" #: footer_pagenumber.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4926,7 +4926,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150534\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Field - Page Number</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 字段 - 页码</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 字段 - 页码</emph>」。" #: footer_pagenumber.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4950,7 +4950,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155532\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in front of the page number field, type <item type=\"literal\">Page</item> and enter a space; click after the field, enter a space and then type <item type=\"literal\">of</item> and enter another space." -msgstr "在页码字段的前面单击，键入 <item type=\"literal\">Page</item> 并输入一个空格；在该字段的后面单击，输入空格并键入 <item type=\"literal\">of</item>，然后输入另一个空格。" +msgstr "在页码字段的前面点击，输入 <item type=\"literal\">Page</item> 并输入一个空格；在该字段的后面点击，输入空格并输入 <item type=\"literal\">of</item>，然后输入另一个空格。" #: footer_pagenumber.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -4958,7 +4958,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155554\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Field - Page Count</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 字段 - 页数</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 字段 - 页数</emph>」。" #: footnote_usage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5006,7 +5006,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155903\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in your document where you want to place the anchor of the note." -msgstr "在文档中要放置备注标记的位置单击。" +msgstr "在文档中要放置备注标记的位置点击。" #: footnote_usage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5022,7 +5022,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150937\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Numbering</item> area, select the format that you want to use. If you select <item type=\"menuitem\">Character</item>, click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Choose</item> button and select the character that you want to use for the footnote." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">编号</item>区域中，选择要使用的格式。如果选择<item type=\"menuitem\">字符</item>，则单击浏览按钮 (<item type=\"menuitem\">...</item>)，然后选择要用于脚注的字符。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">编号</item>区域中，选择要使用的格式。如果选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">字符</item>」，则点击浏览按钮 (<item type=\"menuitem\">...</item>」)，然后选择要用于脚注的字符。" #: footnote_usage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5030,7 +5030,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150508\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Type</item> area, select <item type=\"menuitem\">Footnote</item> or <item type=\"menuitem\">Endnote</item>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>区域中，选择<item type=\"menuitem\">脚注</item>或<item type=\"menuitem\">尾注</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>区域中，选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">脚注</item>」或<item type=\"menuitem\">尾注</item>」。" #: footnote_usage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5038,7 +5038,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150704\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: footnote_usage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5046,7 +5046,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150729\n" "help.text" msgid "Type the note." -msgstr "键入备注内容。" +msgstr "输入备注内容。" #: footnote_usage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5054,7 +5054,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3148843\n" "help.text" msgid "<image id=\"img_id3148857\" src=\"cmd/sc_insertfootnote.png\" width=\"0.564cm\" height=\"0.564cm\"><alt id=\"alt_id3148857\">Icon</alt></image>" -msgstr "<image id=\"img_id3148857\" src=\"cmd/sc_insertfootnote.png\" width=\"5.64mm\" height=\"5.64mm\"><alt id=\"alt_id3148857\">图标</alt></image>" +msgstr "<image id=\"img_id3148857\" src=\"cmd/sc_insertfootnote.png\" width=\"0.564cm\" height=\"0.564cm\"><alt id=\"alt_id3148857\">图标</alt></image>" #: footnote_usage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5062,7 +5062,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153176\n" "help.text" msgid "You can also insert footnotes by clicking the <emph>Insert Footnote Directly</emph> icon on the <emph>Insert</emph> toolbar." -msgstr "您也可以通过在<emph>插入</emph>工具栏上单击<emph>直接插入脚注</emph>图标插入脚注。" +msgstr "您也可以通过在「<emph>插入</emph>」工具栏上点击「<emph>直接插入脚注</emph>」图标插入脚注。" #: footnote_usage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5086,7 +5086,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155563\n" "help.text" msgid "To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text." -msgstr "要编辑脚注或尾注的文字，请在备注中单击，或者单击文字中的备注标记。" +msgstr "要编辑脚注或尾注的文字，请在备注中点击，或者点击文字中的备注标记。" #: footnote_usage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5110,7 +5110,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145081\n" "help.text" msgid "To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose <link href=\"text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp\" name=\"Edit - Footnote\"><emph>Edit - Footnote/Endnote</emph></link>." -msgstr "要编辑脚注标记或尾注标记的编号属性，请在标记前单击，然后选择<link href=\"text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp\" name=\"Edit - Footnote\"><emph>编辑 - 脚注/尾注</emph></link>。" +msgstr "要编辑脚注标记或尾注标记的编号属性，请在标记前点击，然后选择<link href=\"text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp\" name=\"Edit - Footnote\"><emph>编辑 - 脚注/尾注</emph></link>。" #: footnote_usage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5126,7 +5126,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147813\n" "help.text" msgid "To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose <emph>Format - Page</emph>, and then click the <link href=\"text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp\" name=\"Footnote\"><emph>Footnote</emph></link> tab." -msgstr "要编辑脚注或尾注的文字区域属性，请选择<emph>格式 - 页面</emph>，然后单击<link href=\"text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp\" name=\"脚注\"><emph>脚注</emph></link>选项卡。" +msgstr "要编辑脚注或尾注的文字区域属性，请选择「<emph>格式 - 页面</emph>」，然后点击<link href=\"text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp\" name=\"脚注\"><emph>脚注</emph></link>选项卡。" #: footnote_usage.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5174,7 +5174,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155603\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in a footnote or endnote." -msgstr "在脚注或尾注中单击。" +msgstr "在脚注或尾注中点击。" #: footnote_with_line.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5190,7 +5190,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154251\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click the Paragraph Style that you want to modify, for example, \"Footnote\", and choose <emph>Modify</emph>." -msgstr "在您要修改的段落样式（如“脚注”）上单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>修改</emph>。" +msgstr "在您要修改的段落样式（如「脚注」）上点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>修改</emph>」。" #: footnote_with_line.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5206,7 +5206,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147110\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Default</item> area, click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Set Top and Bottom Borders Only</item> icon." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">默认值</item>区域中，单击<item type=\"menuitem\">仅采用上下边框</item>图标。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">默认值</item>区域中，点击<item type=\"menuitem\">仅采用上下边框</item>」图标。" #: footnote_with_line.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5214,7 +5214,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150931\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Line</item> area, click a line in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Style</item> list." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">线条</item>区域中，单击<item type=\"menuitem\">风格</item>列表中的某条线。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">线条</item>区域中，点击<item type=\"menuitem\">风格</item>」列表中的某条线。" #: footnote_with_line.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5222,7 +5222,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150961\n" "help.text" msgid "Select \"White\" in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Color</item> box. If the background of the page is not white, select the color that best matches the background color." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">颜色</item>框中选择“白色”。如果页面的背景不是白色，请选择与背景色最适合的颜色。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">颜色</item>」框中选择「白色」。如果页面的背景不是白色，请选择与背景色最适合的颜色。" #: footnote_with_line.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5238,7 +5238,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150709\n" "help.text" msgid "Enter a value in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Top</item> and <item type=\"menuitem\">Bottom</item> boxes." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">上</item>框和<item type=\"menuitem\">下</item>框中各输入一个值。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">上</item>」框和<item type=\"menuitem\">下</item>框中各输入一个值。" #: footnote_with_line.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5246,7 +5246,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150740\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: footnote_with_line.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5318,7 +5318,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1066B\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Tools - Mail Merge Wizard</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>工具 - 邮件合并向导</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>工具 - 邮件合并向导</emph>」。" #: form_letters_main.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5326,7 +5326,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10672\n" "help.text" msgid "You see the Mail Merge Wizard dialog. The following is an example of one of many possible ways to navigate the wizard's pages:" -msgstr "打开“邮件合并向导”对话框。下面举例介绍浏览向导各页面的众多方式中的一个：" +msgstr "打开「邮件合并向导」对话框。下面举例介绍浏览向导各页面的众多方式中的一个:" #: form_letters_main.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5334,7 +5334,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10676\n" "help.text" msgid "Select <emph>Start from a template</emph>, and click the <emph>Browse</emph> button." -msgstr "选择<emph>从模板开始</emph>，然后单击<emph>浏览</emph>按钮。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>从模板开始</emph>」，然后点击「<emph>浏览</emph>」按钮。" #: form_letters_main.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5358,7 +5358,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id2669759\n" "help.text" msgid "Select <emph>Letter</emph> and click <emph>Next</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>信函</emph>然后单击<emph>下一步</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>信函</emph>然后点击<emph>下一步</emph>」。" #: form_letters_main.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5366,7 +5366,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN106BD\n" "help.text" msgid "On the next step of the wizard, click the <emph>Select Address List</emph> button to check that you are using the correct address list. If you want to use an address block, select an address block type, match the data fields if necessary, and click <emph>Next</emph>." -msgstr "在向导的下一步，点击“<emph>选择地址列表</emph>”按钮可检查您使用的是不是正确的地址列表。如果您希望使用地址块，请选择地址块类型，如果需要请匹配数据字段，并点击“<emph>下一步</emph>”。" +msgstr "在向导的下一步，点击「<emph>选择地址列表</emph>」按钮可检查您使用的是不是正确的地址列表。如果您希望使用地址块，请选择地址块类型，如果需要请匹配数据字段，并点击「<emph>下一步</emph>」。" #: form_letters_main.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5374,7 +5374,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN106C5\n" "help.text" msgid "Next follows the <emph>Create a salutation</emph> step. Deselect the <emph>Insert personalized salutation</emph> box. Under <emph>General salutation</emph>, select the salutation that you want on top of all letters." -msgstr "然后是<emph>创建称呼</emph>步骤。取消选择<emph>插入个性化称呼</emph>复选框。在<emph>通用称呼</emph>中，选择在所有信函顶部使用的称呼。" +msgstr "然后是<emph>创建称呼</emph>步骤。取消选择「<emph>插入个性化称呼</emph>复选框。在<emph>通用称呼</emph>」中，选择在所有信函顶部使用的称呼。" #: form_letters_main.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5390,7 +5390,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN106D5\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Next</emph> and finally <emph>Finish</emph> to create the mail merge." -msgstr "单击<emph>下一步</emph>，最后单击<emph>完成</emph>创建邮件合并。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>下一步</emph>」，最后点击<emph>完成</emph>创建邮件合并。" #: globaldoc.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5478,7 +5478,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155180\n" "help.text" msgid "When you add a document to a master document or create a new subdocument, a link is created in the master document. You cannot edit the content of a subdocument directly in the master document, but you can use the Navigator to open any subdocument for edit." -msgstr "在主控文档中添加文档或创建新的子文档时，主控文档中会创建一个链接。不能在主控文档中直接编辑子文档的内容，但可以通过“导航”打开任何子文档进行编辑。" +msgstr "在主控文档中添加文档或创建新的子文档时，主控文档中会创建一个链接。不能在主控文档中直接编辑子文档的内容，但可以通过「导航」打开任何子文档进行编辑。" #: globaldoc.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5574,7 +5574,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149634\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5582,7 +5582,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149956\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>File - New - Master Document</emph>." -msgstr "选择 <emph>文件 - 新建 - Master 文档</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>文件 - 新建 - Master 文档</emph>」。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5590,7 +5590,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149612\n" "help.text" msgid "Open an existing document and choose <emph>File - Send - Create Master Document</emph>." -msgstr "打开现有文档并选择 <emph>文件 - 发送 - 创建 Master 文档</emph>。" +msgstr "打开现有文档并选择「<emph>文件 - 发送 - 创建 Master 文档</emph>」。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5598,7 +5598,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149873\n" "help.text" msgid "If you are creating a new master document, the first entry in the Navigator should be a <item type=\"menuitem\">Text</item> entry. Type an introduction or enter some text. This ensures that after having edited an existing style in the master document, you see the changed style when viewing the subdocuments." -msgstr "如果正在创建新的主控文档，则导航器的第一个条目应为<item type=\"menuitem\">文本</item>条目。键入介绍或输入一些文本，这确保您在主控文档中编辑一个现有样式之后查看子文档时能够看到修改后的样式。" +msgstr "如果正在创建新的主控文档，则导航器的第一个条目应为<item type=\"menuitem\">文本</item>条目。输入介绍或输入一些文本，这确保您在主控文档中编辑一个现有样式之后查看子文档时能够看到修改后的样式。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5606,7 +5606,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145114\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Navigator</item> for master documents (should open automatically, else press F5 to open), click and hold the <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert</item> icon, and do one of the following:" -msgstr "在主控文档的<item type=\"menuitem\">导航</item>（应该自动打开，或按 F5 打开）中，单击并按住<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>图标，然后执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "在主控文档的<item type=\"menuitem\">导航</item>（应该自动打开，或按 F5 打开）中，点击并按住<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>图标，然后执行以下操作之一:" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5614,7 +5614,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156240\n" "help.text" msgid "To insert an existing file as a subdocument, choose <emph>File</emph>, locate the file that you want to include, and then click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "要将现有文件作为子文档插入，请选择<emph>文件</emph>，找到要包含的文件，然后单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "要将现有文件作为子文档插入，请选择「<emph>文件</emph>」，找到要包含的文件，然后点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5622,7 +5622,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145405\n" "help.text" msgid "To create a new subdocument, choose <emph>New Document</emph>, type a name for the file, and then click <emph>Save</emph>." -msgstr "要新建子文档，请选择 <emph>新建文档</emph>，输入文件名，然后单击 <emph>保存</emph>。" +msgstr "要新建子文档，请选择「<emph>新建文档</emph>」，输入文件名，然后点击「<emph>保存</emph>」。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5638,7 +5638,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153382\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>File - Save</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>文件 - 保存</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>文件 - 保存</emph>」。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5654,7 +5654,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154255\n" "help.text" msgid "Use the Navigator for rearranging and editing the subdocuments in a master document." -msgstr "使用“导航”在主控文档中重新排列和编辑子文档。" +msgstr "使用「导航」在主控文档中重新排列和编辑子文档。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5662,7 +5662,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155879\n" "help.text" msgid "To open a subdocument for editing, double-click the name of the subdocument in the Navigator." -msgstr "要打开一个子文档进行编辑，请在“导航”中双击该子文档的名称。" +msgstr "要打开一个子文档进行编辑，请在「导航」中双击该子文档的名称。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5670,7 +5670,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155931\n" "help.text" msgid "To remove a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose <emph>Delete</emph>. The subdocument file is not deleted, only the entry in the Navigator is removed." -msgstr "要从主控文档中删除子文档，请右键单击“导航”列表中的子文档，然后选择<emph>删除</emph>。将不会删除子文档文件，仅删除“导航”列表中的条目。" +msgstr "要从主控文档中删除子文档，请右键点击「导航」列表中的子文档，然后选择「<emph>删除</emph>」。将不会删除子文档文件，仅删除「导航」列表中的条目。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5678,7 +5678,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3148677\n" "help.text" msgid "To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose <emph>Insert - Text</emph>. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator." -msgstr "要在主控文档中添加文本，请右键单击“导航”列表中的项目，然后选择<emph>插入 - 文本</emph>。在主控文档选定项目之前插入文本区域，您可以在此输入您想输入的文本。不能在“导航”中已存在的文本条目旁边插入文本。" +msgstr "要在主控文档中添加文本，请右键点击「导航」列表中的项目，然后选择「<emph>插入 - 文本</emph>」。在主控文档选中项目之前插入文本区域，您可以在此输入您想输入的文本。不能在「导航」中已存在的文本条目旁边插入文本。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5686,7 +5686,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149982\n" "help.text" msgid "To reorder the subdocuments in a master document, drag a subdocument to a new location in the Navigator list. You can also select a subdocument in the list, and click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Move down</item> or <item type=\"menuitem\">Move up</item> icon." -msgstr "要在主控文档中重新排列子文档的顺序，请在“导航”列表中将子文档拖到新位置。也可以在此列表中选择子文档，并单击<emph>向下移动</emph>或<emph>向上移动</emph>图标。" +msgstr "要在主控文档中重新排列子文档的顺序，请在「导航」列表中将子文档拖到新位置。也可以在此列表中选择子文档，并点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">向下移动</item>」或<item type=\"menuitem\">向上移动</item>图标。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5694,7 +5694,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153022\n" "help.text" msgid "To add an index, such as a table of contents, right-click in the Navigator list, and then choose <emph>Insert - Index</emph>." -msgstr "要在主控文档中添加索引（如目录），请在“导航”列表中单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>插入 - 索引</emph>。" +msgstr "要在主控文档中添加索引（如目录），请在「导航」列表中点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>插入 - 索引</emph>」。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5710,7 +5710,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153632\n" "help.text" msgid "To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the <emph>Update</emph> icon." -msgstr "要更新主控文档中的索引，请在“导航”中选择索引，然后单击<emph>更新</emph>图标。" +msgstr "要更新主控文档中的索引，请在「导航」中选择索引，然后点击「<emph>更新</emph>」图标。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5718,7 +5718,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10C40\n" "help.text" msgid "When you insert an object like a frame or a picture into a master document, do not anchor the object \"to page\". Instead, set the anchor \"to paragraph\" on the <emph>Format - (Object type) - Type</emph> tab page, and then set the object's position relative to \"Entire Page\" in the <emph>Horizontal</emph> and <emph>Vertical</emph> list boxes." -msgstr "在象插入框架或图片那样向主控文档中插入对象时，请勿将该对象锁定\"在页面上\"。而应该在<emph>格式 -（对象类型）- 类型</emph>选项卡页面上将锁定设置为\"在段落上\"，然后在<emph>水平</emph>和<emph>垂直</emph>列表框中将该对象的位置设置为与\"整页\"相关。" +msgstr "在象插入框架或图片那样向主控文档中插入对象时，请勿将该对象锁定\"在页面上\"。而应该在「<emph>格式 -（对象类型）- 类型</emph>」选项卡页面上将锁定设置为\"在段落上\"，然后在「<emph>水平</emph>和<emph>垂直</emph>」列表框中将该对象的位置设置为与\"整页\"相关。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5734,7 +5734,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3152760\n" "help.text" msgid "Ensure that each subdocument starts with a heading that uses the same paragraph style, for example \"Heading 1\"." -msgstr "确保每个子文档都以使用同一段落样式的标题（如“标题 1”）开始。" +msgstr "确保每个子文档都以使用同一段落样式的标题（如「标题 1」）开始。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5750,7 +5750,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153907\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click \"Heading 1\" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>." -msgstr "在“标题 1”上单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>修改</emph>。" +msgstr "在「标题 1」上点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>修改</emph>」。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5766,7 +5766,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149770\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Breaks</item> area, select <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert</item>, and then select “Page”in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Type</item> box." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">换行符</item>区域中，选择<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>，然后选择<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>框中的“页”。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">换行符</item>区域中，选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>」，然后选择<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>」框中的「页」。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5774,7 +5774,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150224\n" "help.text" msgid "If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select <emph>With Page Style</emph>, and select \"Right page\" in the box." -msgstr "如果要让每个子文档都在奇数页上开始，请选择<emph>使用页面样式</emph>，并从该框中选择“右页”。" +msgstr "如果要让每个子文档都在奇数页上开始，请选择「<emph>使用页面样式</emph>」，并从该框中选择「右页」。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5782,7 +5782,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145205\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5798,7 +5798,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150315\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">File - Export</item>." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">文件 - 导出</item>。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">文件 - 导出</item>」。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5806,7 +5806,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3148580\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>File format</emph> list, select a text document file format and click <emph>Export</emph>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"unknown\">文件格式</item>列表中选择文本文档文件格式，然后单击<emph>导出</emph>。" +msgstr "在「<emph>文件格式</emph>」列表中选择文本文档文件格式，然后点击「<emph>导出</emph>」。" #: globaldoc_howtos.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5862,7 +5862,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150511\n" "help.text" msgid "The page style for the current page is displayed in the <emph>Status Bar</emph>." -msgstr "当前页面的页面样式显示在<emph>状态栏</emph>中。" +msgstr "当前页面的页面样式显示在「<emph>状态栏</emph>」中。" #: header_footer.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5886,7 +5886,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153726\n" "help.text" msgid "You can also choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Format - Page</item>, click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Header</item> or <item type=\"menuitem\">Footer</item> tab, and then select <item type=\"menuitem\">Header on</item> or <item type=\"menuitem\">Footer on</item>. Clear the <item type=\"menuitem\">Same content left/right</item> check box if you want to define different headers and footers for even and odd pages." -msgstr "还可以选择<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 页面</item>，单击<item type=\"menuitem\">页眉</item>或<item type=\"menuitem\">页脚</item>选项卡，然后选择<item type=\"menuitem\">显示页眉</item>或<item type=\"menuitem\">显示页脚</item>。如果您要为偶数页和奇数页定义不同的页眉和页脚，则清除<item type=\"menuitem\">左右内容相同</item>复选框。" +msgstr "还可以选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 页面</item>」，点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">页眉</item>」或<item type=\"menuitem\">页脚</item>选项卡，然后选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">显示页眉</item>」或<item type=\"menuitem\">显示页脚</item>。如果您要为偶数页和奇数页定义不同的页眉和页脚，则清除<item type=\"menuitem\">左右内容相同</item>复选框。" #: header_footer.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5910,7 +5910,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150717\n" "help.text" msgid "Some of the header and footer options are also available for HTML documents. Headers and footers are not supported by HTML and instead are exported with special tags, so that they can be viewed in a browser. Headers and footers are only exported in HTML documents if they are enabled in Web Layout mode. When you reopen the document in $[officename], the headers and footers are displayed correctly, including any fields that you inserted." -msgstr "某些页眉和页脚选项也适用于 HTML 文档。HTML 不支持页眉和页脚，而是使用特殊标记将其导出以便在浏览器中进行查看。仅当在“Web 版式”模式下启用页眉和页脚时，才会在 HTML 文档中导出它们。在 $[officename] 中重新打开文档时，将正确显示页眉和页脚（包括插入的所有字段）。" +msgstr "某些页眉和页脚选项也适用于 HTML 文档。HTML 不支持页眉和页脚，而是使用特殊标记将其导出以便在浏览器中进行查看。仅当在「Web 版式」模式下启用页眉和页脚时，才会在 HTML 文档中导出它们。在 $[officename] 中重新打开文档时，将正确显示页眉和页脚（包括插入的所有字段）。" #: header_footer.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5958,7 +5958,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147105\n" "help.text" msgid "You can also use the mirrored page layout if you want to add a header to a page style that has different inner and outer page margins. To apply this option to a page style, choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Format - Page</item>, click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Page</item> tab, and in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Layout settings</item> area, choose “Mirrored” in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Page layout</item> box." -msgstr "如果您要将页眉添加到具有不同的内部页边距和外部页边距的页面样式中，则还可以使用翻转的页面版式。要将此选项应用于页面样式，请选择<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 页面</item>，单击<item type=\"menuitem\">页</item>选项卡，然后在<item type=\"menuitem\">设置版式</item>区域中，选择<item type=\"menuitem\">页面版式</item>框中的“翻转的”。" +msgstr "如果您要将页眉添加到具有不同的内部页边距和外部页边距的页面样式中，则还可以使用翻转的页面版式。要将此选项应用于页面样式，请选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 页面</item>」，点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">页</item>」选项卡，然后在「<item type=\"menuitem\">设置版式</item>区域中，选择<item type=\"menuitem\">页面版式</item>」框中的「翻转的」。" #: header_pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5990,7 +5990,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150510\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click \"Right Page\" in the list of page styles and choose <emph>Modify</emph>." -msgstr "在列表中的“右页”上单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>修改</emph>。" +msgstr "在列表中的「右页」上点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>修改</emph>」。" #: header_pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -5998,7 +5998,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150536\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Page Styles</item> dialog, click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Header</item> tab." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">页面样式</item>对话框中，单击<item type=\"menuitem\">页眉</item>选项卡。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">页面样式</item>对话框中，点击<item type=\"menuitem\">页眉</item>」选项卡。" #: header_pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6006,7 +6006,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153750\n" "help.text" msgid "Select <item type=\"menuitem\">Header on</item> and click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Organizer</item> tab." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">显示页眉</item>，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">管理</item>选项卡。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">显示页眉</item>」，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">管理</item>」选项卡。" #: header_pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6014,7 +6014,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3146865\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Next Style</item> box, select \"Left Page\"." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">下一个样式</item>框中，选择“左页”。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">下一个样式</item>」框中，选择「左页」。" #: header_pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6022,7 +6022,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3146889\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: header_pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6038,7 +6038,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150748\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Page Styles</item> dialog, click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Header</item> tab." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">页面样式</item>对话框中，单击<item type=\"menuitem\">页眉</item>选项卡。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">页面样式</item>对话框中，点击<item type=\"menuitem\">页眉</item>」选项卡。" #: header_pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6046,7 +6046,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153172\n" "help.text" msgid "Select <item type=\"menuitem\">Header on</item> and click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Organizer</item> tab." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">显示页眉</item>，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">管理</item>选项卡。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">显示页眉</item>」，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">管理</item>」选项卡。" #: header_pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6054,7 +6054,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147061\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Next Style</item> box, select \"Right Page\"." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">下一个样式</item>框中，选择“右页”。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">下一个样式</item>」框中，选择「右页」。" #: header_pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6062,7 +6062,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147086\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: header_pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6070,7 +6070,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145263\n" "help.text" msgid "Double-click \"Right Page\" in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page." -msgstr "双击页面样式列表中的“右页”，对当前页面应用该样式。" +msgstr "双击页面样式列表中的「右页」，对当前页面应用该样式。" #: header_pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6134,7 +6134,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155898\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Style</item> box, select the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles, for example, \"Heading 1\"." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">样式</item>框中，选择要用于章节标题的段落样式，例如“标题 1”。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">样式</item>」框中，选择要用于章节标题的段落样式，例如「标题 1」。" #: header_with_chapter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6142,7 +6142,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147124\n" "help.text" msgid "Select the numbering style for the chapter titles in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Number</item> box, for example, \"1,2,3...\"." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">编号</item>框中选择章节标题的编号样式，例如“\"1,2,3...”。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">编号</item>」框中选择章节标题的编号样式，例如「\"1,2,3...」。" #: header_with_chapter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6150,7 +6150,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150219\n" "help.text" msgid "Type \"Chapter\" followed by a space in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Before</item> box." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">之前</item>框中键入“章节”，后面紧跟一个空格。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">之前</item>」框中输入「章节」，后面紧跟一个空格。" #: header_with_chapter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6158,7 +6158,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150245\n" "help.text" msgid "Enter a space in the <item type=\"menuitem\">After</item> box." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">之后</item>框中输入一个空格。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">之后</item>」框中输入一个空格。" #: header_with_chapter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6166,7 +6166,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150949\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: header_with_chapter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6174,7 +6174,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3150505\n" "help.text" msgid "To Insert the Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer" -msgstr "在页眉或页脚中插入章节名称和章节编号：" +msgstr "在页眉或页脚中插入章节名称和章节编号" #: header_with_chapter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6198,7 +6198,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153762\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in the header or footer." -msgstr "在页眉或页脚中单击。" +msgstr "在页眉或页脚中点击。" #: header_with_chapter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6206,7 +6206,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3146863\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert - Field - More Fields</item> and click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Document</item> tab." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 字段 - 其他</item>，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">功能</item>选项卡。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 字段 - 其他</item>」，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">功能</item>」选项卡。" #: header_with_chapter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6214,7 +6214,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153175\n" "help.text" msgid "Click \"Chapter\" in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Type</item> list and \"Chapter number and name\" in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Format</item> list." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>列表中的“章节”，并单击<item type=\"menuitem\">格式</item>列表中的“章节号和名称”。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>」列表中的「章节」，并点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式</item>」列表中的「章节号和名称」。" #: header_with_chapter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6222,7 +6222,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147065\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then click <emph>Close</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>插入</emph>，然后单击<emph>关闭</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>插入</emph>」，然后点击「<emph>关闭</emph>」。" #: header_with_chapter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6270,7 +6270,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155873\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Format - Page</item> and select the <item type=\"menuitem\">Header</item> or <item type=\"menuitem\">Footer</item> tab." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 页面</item>，然后选择<item type=\"menuitem\">页眉</item>或<item type=\"menuitem\">页脚</item>选项卡。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 页面</item>」，然后选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">页眉</item>」或<item type=\"menuitem\">页脚</item>选项卡。" #: header_with_line.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6286,7 +6286,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147128\n" "help.text" msgid "To add a border or a shadow to the header or the footer, click <item type=\"menuitem\">More</item>. The <item type=\"menuitem\">Border/Background</item> dialog opens." -msgstr "要将边框或阴影添加到页眉或页脚中，请单击<item type=\"menuitem\">更多</item>。此时会打开<item type=\"menuitem\">边框/背景</item>对话框。" +msgstr "要将边框或阴影添加到页眉或页脚中，请点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">更多</item>」。此时会打开<item type=\"menuitem\">边框/背景</item>对话框。" #: header_with_line.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6294,7 +6294,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150520\n" "help.text" msgid "To add a separator line between the header or the footer and the content of the page, click the bottom edge of the square in the <emph>Line arrangement</emph> area. Click a line style in the <emph>Style</emph> box." -msgstr "要在页眉或页脚与页面内容之间添加分隔行，请点击<emph>行布局</emph>区域的底边。在<emph>样式</emph>框中点击行样式。" +msgstr "要在页眉或页脚与页面内容之间添加分隔行，请点击「<emph>行布局</emph>区域的底边。在<emph>样式</emph>」框中点击行样式。" #: header_with_line.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6302,7 +6302,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153742\n" "help.text" msgid "To adjust the spacing between the content of the header or footer and the line, clear the <emph>Synchronize</emph> box, and then enter a value in the<emph> Bottom</emph> box." -msgstr "要调整页眉或页脚内容与行之间的间隔，请清除 <emph>同步</emph> 框，然后在 <emph> 底部</emph> 框中输入值。" +msgstr "要调整页眉或页脚内容与行之间的间隔，请清除 <emph>同步</emph> 框，然后在「<emph>底部</emph>」框中输入值。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6358,7 +6358,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153131\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in your document and choose <emph>Insert - Field - More Fields</emph>." -msgstr "在文档中单击，然后选择<emph>插入 - 字段 - 其他</emph>。" +msgstr "在文档中点击，然后选择「<emph>插入 - 字段 - 其他</emph>」。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6366,7 +6366,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149640\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Variables </emph>tab and click \"Set Variable\" in the <emph>Type </emph>list." -msgstr "单击<emph>变量</emph>选项卡，然后单击<emph>类型</emph>列表中的“设置变量”。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>变量</emph>」选项卡，然后点击「<emph>类型</emph>」列表中的「设置变量」。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6374,7 +6374,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149970\n" "help.text" msgid "Click \"General\" in the <emph>Format </emph>list." -msgstr "单击<emph>格式</emph>列表中的 \"General\"。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>格式</emph>」列表中的 \"General\"。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6382,7 +6382,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149620\n" "help.text" msgid "Type a name for the variable in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Name</item> box, for example, <item type=\"literal\">Hide</item>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">名称</item>框中键入变量的名称，例如，<item type=\"literal\">Hide</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">名称</item>框中输入变量的名称，例如，<item type=\"literal\">Hide</item>」。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6390,7 +6390,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149869\n" "help.text" msgid "Enter a value for the variable in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Value</item> box, for example, <item type=\"literal\">1</item>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">值</item>框中输入变量的值，例如 <item type=\"literal\">1</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">值</item>框中输入变量的值，例如 <item type=\"literal\">1</item>」。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6398,7 +6398,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145108\n" "help.text" msgid "To hide the variable in your document, select <emph>Invisible</emph>." -msgstr "要在文档中隐藏该变量，请选择<emph>不可见</emph>。" +msgstr "要在文档中隐藏该变量，请选择「<emph>不可见</emph>」。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6406,7 +6406,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149585\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert</item> and <item type=\"menuitem\">Close</item>." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>和<item type=\"menuitem\">关闭</item>。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>和<item type=\"menuitem\">关闭</item>」。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6422,7 +6422,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145391\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in the document where you want to add the text." -msgstr "在文档中要添加文字的位置单击。" +msgstr "在文档中要添加文字的位置点击。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6430,7 +6430,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145409\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Field - More Fields</emph> and click the <emph>Functions</emph> tab." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 字段 - 其他</emph>，然后单击<emph>功能</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 字段 - 其他</emph>」，然后点击「<emph>功能</emph>」选项卡。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6438,7 +6438,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155325\n" "help.text" msgid "Click \"Hidden Text\" in the <emph>Type </emph>list." -msgstr "在<emph>类型</emph>列表中单击“隐藏文字”。" +msgstr "在「<emph>类型</emph>」列表中点击「隐藏文字」。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6446,7 +6446,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154404\n" "help.text" msgid "Enter a statement in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Condition</item> box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter <item type=\"literal\">Hide==1</item>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">条件</item>框中输入一条语句。例如，如果使用您以前定义的变量，则输入 <item type=\"literal\">Hide==1</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">条件</item>框中输入一条语句。例如，如果使用您以前定义的变量，则输入 <item type=\"literal\">Hide==1</item>」。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6454,7 +6454,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153371\n" "help.text" msgid "Type the text that you want to hide in the <emph>Hidden text </emph>box." -msgstr "在<emph>隐藏文字</emph>框中键入要隐藏的文字。" +msgstr "在「<emph>隐藏文字</emph>」框中输入要隐藏的文字。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6462,7 +6462,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154233\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert</item> and <item type=\"menuitem\">Close</item>." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>和<item type=\"menuitem\">关闭</item>。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>和<item type=\"menuitem\">关闭</item>」。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6478,7 +6478,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154853\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in the paragraph where you want to add the text." -msgstr "在段落中要添加文字的位置单击鼠标。" +msgstr "在段落中要添加文字的位置点击鼠标。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6486,7 +6486,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154872\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Field - More Fields</emph> and click the <emph>Functions</emph> tab." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 字段 - 其他</emph>，然后单击<emph>功能</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 字段 - 其他</emph>」，然后点击「<emph>功能</emph>」选项卡。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6494,7 +6494,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155902\n" "help.text" msgid "Click \"Hidden Paragraph\" in the <emph>Type </emph>list." -msgstr "单击<emph>类型</emph>列表中的“隐藏段落”。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>类型</emph>」列表中的「隐藏段落」。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6502,7 +6502,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155947\n" "help.text" msgid "Enter a statement in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Condition</item> box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter <item type=\"literal\">Hide==1</item>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">条件</item>框中输入一条语句。例如，如果使用您以前定义的变量，则输入 <item type=\"literal\">Hide==1</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">条件</item>框中输入一条语句。例如，如果使用您以前定义的变量，则输入 <item type=\"literal\">Hide==1</item>」。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6510,7 +6510,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149991\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert</item> and <item type=\"menuitem\">Close</item>." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>和<item type=\"menuitem\">关闭</item>。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>和<item type=\"menuitem\">关闭</item>」。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6542,7 +6542,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153019\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 区域</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 区域</emph>」。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6550,7 +6550,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3148950\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Hide</item> area, select <item type=\"menuitem\">Hide</item>, and then enter an expression in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Condition</item> box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter <item type=\"literal\">Hide==1</item>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">隐藏</item>区域中，选择<item type=\"menuitem\">隐藏</item>，然后在<item type=\"menuitem\">条件</item>框中输入表达式。例如，如果使用您以前定义的变量，则输入 <item type=\"literal\">Hide==1</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">隐藏</item>区域中，选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">隐藏</item>」，然后在「<item type=\"menuitem\">条件</item>」框中输入表达式。例如，如果使用您以前定义的变量，则输入 <item type=\"literal\">Hide==1</item>」。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6558,7 +6558,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153636\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert</item>." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>」。" #: hidden_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6630,7 +6630,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id5659962\n" "help.text" msgid "If you have a text that was hidden by defining a condition with a variable, you have several options to display the hidden text. Do one of the following:" -msgstr "如果您有一个通过带变量的条件所定义的隐藏文本，有多种操作来显示隐藏文本。执行下列的操作之一：" +msgstr "如果您有一个通过带变量的条件所定义的隐藏文本，有多种操作来显示隐藏文本。执行下列的操作之一:" #: hidden_text_display.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6638,7 +6638,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3152777\n" "help.text" msgid "Enable the check mark at <emph>View - Hidden Paragraphs</emph>." -msgstr "在<emph>视图 - 隐藏的段落</emph>中启用复选标记。" +msgstr "在「<emph>视图 - 隐藏的段落</emph>」中启用复选标记。" #: hidden_text_display.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6702,7 +6702,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155858\n" "help.text" msgid "You can insert a cross-reference as a hyperlink in your document using the Navigator. You can even cross-reference items from other <item type=\"productname\">%PRODUCTNAME</item> documents. If you click the hyperlink when the document is opened in <item type=\"productname\">%PRODUCTNAME</item>, you are taken to the cross-referenced item." -msgstr "可以使用“导航”将交叉引用作为超链接插入到文档中，也可以交叉引用其他 <item type=\"productname\">%PRODUCTNAME</item> 文档中的项。当该文档在 <item type=\"productname\">%PRODUCTNAME</item> 中打开时，如果单击超链接，就会转到交叉引用的项。" +msgstr "可以使用「导航」将交叉引用作为超链接插入到文档中，也可以交叉引用其他 <item type=\"productname\">%PRODUCTNAME</item> 文档中的项。当该文档在「<item type=\"productname\">%PRODUCTNAME</item>」中打开时，如果点击超链接，就会转到交叉引用的项。" #: hyperlinks.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6718,7 +6718,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3148846\n" "help.text" msgid "On the Standard bar, click the <emph>Navigator</emph> icon." -msgstr "在“标准”栏上，单击<emph>导航</emph>图标。" +msgstr "在「标准」栏上，点击「<emph>导航</emph>」图标。" #: hyperlinks.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6726,7 +6726,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156108\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the arrow next to the <item type=\"menuitem\">Drag Mode</item> icon, and ensure that <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert as Hyperlink</item> is selected." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">拖动模式</item>图标旁边的箭头，并确保已选中<item type=\"menuitem\">作为超链接插入</item>。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">拖动模式</item>」图标旁边的箭头，并确保已选中<item type=\"menuitem\">作为超链接插入</item>。" #: hyperlinks.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6734,7 +6734,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153396\n" "help.text" msgid "In the list at the bottom of the Navigator, select the document containing the item that you want to cross-reference." -msgstr "在“导航”底端的列表中，选择含有要交叉引用的项的文档。" +msgstr "在「导航」底端的列表中，选择含有要交叉引用的项的文档。" #: hyperlinks.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6742,7 +6742,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153416\n" "help.text" msgid "In the Navigator list, click the plus sign next to the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink." -msgstr "在“导航”列表中，单击要作为超链接插入的项旁边的加号。" +msgstr "在「导航」列表中，点击要作为超链接插入的项旁边的加号。" #: hyperlinks.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6806,7 +6806,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153658\n" "help.text" msgid "Select a dictionary in the <emph>User-defined dictionary </emph>list, and then click <emph>Edit</emph>." -msgstr "在<emph>自定义词典</emph>列表中选择词典，然后单击<emph>编辑</emph>。" +msgstr "在「<emph>自定义词典</emph>列表中选择词典，然后点击<emph>编辑</emph>」。" #: hyphen_prevent.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6814,7 +6814,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147125\n" "help.text" msgid "If the list is empty, click <emph>New</emph> to create a dictionary." -msgstr "如果列表是空白的，请单击<emph>新建</emph>创建词典。" +msgstr "如果列表是空白的，请点击<emph>新建</emph>创建词典。" #: hyphen_prevent.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6822,7 +6822,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150218\n" "help.text" msgid "In the<emph> Word</emph> box, type the word you want to exclude from hyphenation, followed by an equal sign (=), for example, \"pretentious=\"." -msgstr "在「<emph>单词</emph>」框中，键入希望排除断词的字词，并以等号 (=) 结尾，例如「pretentious=」。" +msgstr "在「<emph>单词</emph>」框中，输入希望排除断词的字词，并以等号 (=) 结尾，例如「pretentious=」。" #: hyphen_prevent.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6830,7 +6830,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150247\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>New</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>新建</emph>，然后单击<emph>关闭</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>新建</emph>」，然后点击「<emph>关闭</emph>」。" #: hyphen_prevent.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6854,7 +6854,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id0302200910262850\n" "help.text" msgid "Enable the special features of complex text layout (CTL) languages: Choose <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\"><item type=\"menuitem\">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</item></caseinline><defaultinline><item type=\"menuitem\">Tools - Options</item></defaultinline></switchinline><item type=\"menuitem\"> - Language Settings - Languages</item> and check <emph>Enabled for complex text layout (CTL)</emph>. Click OK." -msgstr "启用复杂的文本版式（CTL）语言的特定功能： 选择 <item type=\"menuitem\"><switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">%PRODUCTNAME - 首选项</caseinline><defaultinline>工具 - 选项</defaultinline></switchinline> - 语言设置 - 语言</item>然后选中<emph>已为复杂的文本版式 (CTL) 启用</emph>。单击“确认”。" +msgstr "启用复杂的文本版式（CTL）语言的特定功能: 选择 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\"><item type=\"menuitem\">%PRODUCTNAME - 偏好设置</item></caseinline><defaultinline><item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 选项</item></defaultinline></switchinline><item type=\"menuitem\"> - 语言设置 - 语言</item>然后选中<emph>已为复杂的文本版式 (CTL) 启用</emph>。点击「确认」。" #: hyphen_prevent.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6870,7 +6870,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id0302200910262867\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert - Formatting Mark - No-width no break</item>." -msgstr "选择 <item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 格式标记 - 不间断不空格</item>。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 格式标记 - 不间断不空格</item>」。" #: hyphen_prevent.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6926,7 +6926,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id9936216\n" "help.text" msgid "You can change the indents for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, or for a Paragraph Style." -msgstr "您可以修改当前段落、所有选定的段落或某个段落样式的缩进。" +msgstr "您可以修改当前段落、所有选中的段落或某个段落样式的缩进。" #: indenting.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6934,7 +6934,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7953123\n" "help.text" msgid "You can also <link href=\"text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp\" name=\"ruler\">set indents using the ruler</link>. To display the ruler, choose <item type=\"menuitem\">View - Ruler</item>." -msgstr "您也可以<link href=\"text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp\" name=\"ruler\">使用标尺设置缩进</link>。要显示标尺，请选择<item type=\"menuitem\">视图 - 标尺</item>。" +msgstr "您也可以<link href=\"text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp\" name=\"ruler\">使用标尺设置缩进</link>。要显示标尺，请选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">视图 - 标尺</item>」。" #: indenting.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6942,7 +6942,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id4013794\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing</item> to change the indents for the current paragraph or for all selected paragraphs. You can also <link href=\"text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp\" name=\"ruler\">set indents using the ruler</link>." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 段落 - 缩进和间距</item>来修改当前段落或所有选定段落的缩进。您也可以<link href=\"text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp\" name=\"ruler\">使用标尺设置缩进</link>。" +msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 段落 - 缩进和间距</item>来修改当前段落或所有选中段落的缩进。您也可以<link href=\"text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp\" name=\"ruler\">使用标尺设置缩进</link>。" #: indenting.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6950,7 +6950,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1631824\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click a paragraph and choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Edit Paragraph Style - Indents & Spacing</item> to change the indents for all paragraphs that have the same Paragraph Style." -msgstr "在段落上单击鼠标右键并选择<item type=\"menuitem\">编辑段落样式 - 缩进和间距</item>，修改具有相同“段落样式”的所有段落的缩进。" +msgstr "在段落上点击鼠标右键并选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">编辑段落样式 - 缩进和间距</item>」，修改具有相同「段落样式」的所有段落的缩进。" #: indenting.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -6974,7 +6974,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id4186223\n" "help.text" msgid "For a hanging indent, enter a positive value for <item type=\"menuitem\">Before text</item> and a negative value for <item type=\"menuitem\">First line</item>." -msgstr "对于悬挂式缩进，在<item type=\"menuitem\">在文本前</item>中输入一个正数值，并在<item type=\"menuitem\">第一行</item>中输入一个负数值。" +msgstr "对于悬挂式缩进，在「<item type=\"menuitem\">在文本前</item>」中输入一个正数值，并在「<item type=\"menuitem\">第一行</item>」中输入一个负数值。" #: indenting.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7014,7 +7014,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155855\n" "help.text" msgid "Index entries are inserted as fields into your document. To view fields in your document, choose <item type=\"menuitem\">View</item> and ensure that <item type=\"menuitem\">Field Shadings</item> is selected." -msgstr "索引条目是作为字段插入文档中的。要在文档中查看这些字段，请选择<item type=\"menuitem\">查看</item>，并确保<item type=\"menuitem\">字段阴影</item>已选中。" +msgstr "索引条目是作为字段插入文档中的。要在文档中查看这些字段，请选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">查看</item>」，并确保<item type=\"menuitem\">字段阴影</item>已选中。" #: indices_delete.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7022,7 +7022,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155507\n" "help.text" msgid "Place the cursor immediately in front of the index entry in your document." -msgstr "将光标置于文档中的目录条目之前。" +msgstr "将光标置于文档中的索引条目之前。" #: indices_delete.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7030,7 +7030,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155526\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Edit - Reference - Index Entry...</emph>, and do one of the following:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "选择「<emph>编辑 - 引用 - 索引条目...</emph>」，并执行以下操作之一:" #: indices_delete.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7038,7 +7038,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154238\n" "help.text" msgid "To change the entry, enter different text in the <emph>Entry</emph> box." -msgstr "要更改条目，请在 <emph>条目</emph> 框中输入不同的文本。" +msgstr "要更改条目，请在「<emph>条目</emph>」框中输入不同的文本。" #: indices_delete.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7046,7 +7046,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154263\n" "help.text" msgid "To remove the entry, click <emph>Delete</emph>." -msgstr "要移除条目，请点击 <emph>删除</emph>。" +msgstr "要移除条目，请点击「<emph>删除</emph>」。" #: indices_delete.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7054,7 +7054,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155893\n" "help.text" msgid "To cycle through the index entries in your document, click the next or the previous arrows in the <link href=\"text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp\" name=\"Edit Index Entry dialog\"><emph>Edit Index Entry</emph> dialog</link>." -msgstr "要在文档中的索引条目之间循环，请在<link name=\"编辑索引条目对话框\" href=\"text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp\"><emph>编辑索引条目</emph> 对话框</link>中单击“下一个”或“上一个”箭头按钮。" +msgstr "要在文档中的索引条目之间循环，请在<link href=\"text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp\" name=\"编辑索引条目对话框\">「<emph>编辑索引条目</emph>」对话框</link>中点击「下一个」或「上一个」箭头按钮。" #: indices_edit.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7102,7 +7102,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154248\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click and choose an editing option from the menu." -msgstr "单击鼠标右键，然后从菜单中选择编辑选项。" +msgstr "点击鼠标右键，然后从菜单中选择编辑选项。" #: indices_edit.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7150,7 +7150,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156380\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in a word, or select the words in your document that you want to use as an index entry." -msgstr "单击某个字，或者在文档中选择要用作索引条目的字。" +msgstr "点击某个字词，或者在文档中选择要用作索引条目的字词。" #: indices_enter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7158,7 +7158,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147409\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry</item>, and do one of the following:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 目录和索引 - 索引条目</item>」，并执行以下操作之一:" #: indices_enter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7166,7 +7166,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153417\n" "help.text" msgid "To change the text that appears in the index, type the text that you want in the <emph>Entry</emph> box. The text that you type here does not replace the selected text in the document." -msgstr "要更改索引中出现的文本，请在 <emph>条目</emph> 框输入您想要的文本。您输入的文本不会替代文档中选中的文本。" +msgstr "要更改索引中出现的文本，请在「<emph>条目</emph>」框输入您想要的文本。您输入的文本不会替代文档中选中的文本。" #: indices_enter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7174,7 +7174,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154258\n" "help.text" msgid "To add an index mark to similar words in your document, select <emph>Apply to all similar texts</emph>." -msgstr "要将索引标记添加到文档中类似单词处，请选择<emph>应用到所有相似文本</emph>。" +msgstr "要将索引标记添加到文档中类似单词处，请选择「<emph>应用到所有相似文本</emph>」。" #: indices_enter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7182,7 +7182,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155889\n" "help.text" msgid "To add the entries to a custom index, click the <emph>New User-defined Index</emph> icon, enter the name of the index, and then click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "要向自定义索引中添加条目，请点击<emph>新建用户定义索引</emph>图标，输入索引名称并点击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "要向自定义索引中添加条目，请点击「<emph>新建用户定义索引</emph>」图标，输入索引名称并点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: indices_enter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7198,7 +7198,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147132\n" "help.text" msgid "The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as \"Heading 1\", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents." -msgstr "生成目录的最佳方式是：对目录要包含的段落应用预设的标题段落样式（如“标题 1”）。" +msgstr "生成目录的最佳方式是: 对目录要包含的段落应用预设的标题段落样式（如「标题 1」）。" #: indices_enter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7206,7 +7206,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3150230\n" "help.text" msgid "To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Table of Contents Entry" -msgstr "将自定义段落样式用作目录条目：" +msgstr "将自定义段落样式用作目录条目" #: indices_enter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7222,7 +7222,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150964\n" "help.text" msgid "Select the paragraph style that you want to include in your table of contents in the <emph>Paragraph Style</emph> box." -msgstr "在<emph>段落样式</emph>框中，选择要包含在目录中的段落样式。" +msgstr "在「<emph>段落样式</emph>」框中，选择要包含在目录中的段落样式。" #: indices_enter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7230,7 +7230,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150523\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>Level</emph> list, click the hierarchical level that you want to apply the paragraph style to." -msgstr "在<emph>级别</emph>列表中，单击要对段落样式应用的层次结构级别。" +msgstr "在「<emph>级别</emph>」列表中，点击要对段落样式应用的层次结构级别。" #: indices_enter.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7238,7 +7238,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153730\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>. You can now apply the style to headings in your document and include them in your table of contents." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。现在，您可以对文档中的各个标题应用该样式，并将这些标题包含在目录中。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。现在，您可以对文档中的各个标题应用该样式，并将这些标题包含在目录中。" #: indices_form.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7286,7 +7286,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147110\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click in the index or table of contents, and then choose <emph>Edit Index or Table of Contents</emph>." -msgstr "在索引或目录中单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>编辑索引/目录</emph>。" +msgstr "在索引或目录中点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>编辑索引/目录</emph>」。" #: indices_form.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7294,7 +7294,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147135\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Styles </emph>tab." -msgstr "单击<emph>样式</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>样式</emph>」选项卡。" #: indices_form.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7302,7 +7302,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150229\n" "help.text" msgid "Click an index level in the <emph>Levels </emph>list." -msgstr "单击<emph>级别</emph>列表中的级。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>级别</emph>」列表中的级。" #: indices_form.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7310,7 +7310,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150934\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the style that you want to apply in the <emph>Paragraph Style </emph>list." -msgstr "在<emph>段落样式</emph>列表中，单击要应用的样式。" +msgstr "在「<emph>段落样式</emph>」列表中，点击要应用的样式。" #: indices_form.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7318,7 +7318,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150960\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the assign button <emph><</emph>." -msgstr "单击指定按钮 <emph><</emph>。" +msgstr "点击指定按钮「<emph><</emph>」。" #: indices_form.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7326,7 +7326,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150516\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: indices_form.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7350,7 +7350,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150712\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click in the table of contents, and then choose <emph>Edit Index or Table of Contents</emph>." -msgstr "在目录中单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>编辑索引/目录</emph>。" +msgstr "在目录中点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>编辑索引/目录</emph>」。" #: indices_form.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7358,7 +7358,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150738\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Entries</emph> tab." -msgstr "单击<emph>条目</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>条目</emph>」选项卡。" #: indices_form.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7366,7 +7366,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3148399\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Level</item> list click the heading level that you want to assign hyperlinks to." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">级别</item>列表中，单击要指定超链接的标题级别。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">级别</item>」列表中，点击要指定超链接的标题级别。" #: indices_form.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7374,7 +7374,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3148424\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>Structure </emph>area, click in the box in front of <emph>E#</emph>, and then click <emph>Hyperlink</emph>." -msgstr "在<emph>结构</emph>区域中，单击 <emph>E#</emph> 前面的框，然后单击<emph>超链接</emph>。" +msgstr "在「<emph>结构</emph>区域中，点击「<emph>E#</emph>」前面的框，然后点击<emph>超链接</emph>」。" #: indices_form.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7382,7 +7382,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153171\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in the box behind the <emph>E</emph>, and then click <emph>Hyperlink</emph>." -msgstr "在 <emph>E</emph> 后面的框中单击鼠标，然后单击<emph>超链接</emph>。" +msgstr "在「<emph>E</emph> 后面的框中点击鼠标，然后点击<emph>超链接</emph>」。" #: indices_form.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7390,7 +7390,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147060\n" "help.text" msgid "Repeat for each heading level that you want to create hyperlinks for, or click the <item type=\"menuitem\">All</item> button to apply the formatting to all levels." -msgstr "对要创建超链接的每个标题级别重复上述步骤，或单击<item type=\"menuitem\">所有</item>按钮，对所有级别应用格式。" +msgstr "对要创建超链接的每个标题级别重复上述步骤，或点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">所有</item>」按钮，对所有级别应用格式。" #: indices_index.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7422,7 +7422,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154233\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in your document where you want to insert the index." -msgstr "在文档中要插入索引的位置单击。" +msgstr "在文档中要插入索引的位置点击。" #: indices_index.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7446,7 +7446,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147114\n" "help.text" msgid "If you want to use a concordance file, select <item type=\"menuitem\">Concordance file</item> in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Options</item> area, click the <item type=\"menuitem\">File</item> button, and then locate an existing file or create a new concordance file." -msgstr "如果您要使用语汇索引文件，则选择<item type=\"menuitem\">选项</item>区域中的<item type=\"menuitem\">语汇索引文件</item>，单击<item type=\"menuitem\">文件</item>按钮，然后找到现有文件或新建一个对应文件。" +msgstr "如果您要使用语汇索引文件，则选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">选项</item>区域中的<item type=\"menuitem\">语汇索引文件</item>」，点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">文件</item>」按钮，然后找到现有文件或新建一个对应文件。" #: indices_index.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7454,7 +7454,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150223\n" "help.text" msgid "Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the <emph>Entries</emph> tab, and then select <emph>Alphabetical delimiter</emph>. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the <emph>Styles</emph> tab." -msgstr "在此对话框的各选项卡中，设置索引的格式选项。例如，要想在索引中使用单字母标题，请单击「<emph>条目</emph>」选项卡，然后选择「<emph>字母顺序分隔符</emph>」。要修改索引中各个级别的格式，请单击「<emph>样式</emph>」选项卡。" +msgstr "在此对话框的各选项卡中，设置索引的格式选项。例如，要想在索引中使用单字母标题，请点击「<emph>条目</emph>」选项卡，然后选择「<emph>字母顺序分隔符</emph>」。要修改索引中各个级别的格式，请点击「<emph>样式</emph>」选项卡。" #: indices_index.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7462,7 +7462,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150946\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: indices_index.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7470,7 +7470,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150502\n" "help.text" msgid "To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose <emph>Update Index or Table of Contents</emph>." -msgstr "要更新索引，请在索引上单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>更新索引/目录</emph>。" +msgstr "要更新索引，请在索引上点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>更新索引/目录</emph>」。" #: indices_index.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7558,7 +7558,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147123\n" "help.text" msgid "Type a name for the bibliography entry in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Short name</item> box, and then add additional information to the record in the remaining boxes." -msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">简称</item>」框中输入参考文献条目的名称，并在其余框中添加其他信息。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">简称</item>」框中输入参考文献条目的名称，并在其余框中添加该记录的其他信息。" #: indices_literature.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7582,7 +7582,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150945\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry." -msgstr "在文档中要添加文献条目的位置单击。" +msgstr "在文档中要添加文献条目的位置点击。" #: indices_literature.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7598,7 +7598,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150525\n" "help.text" msgid "Select <emph>From document content</emph> and click <emph>New</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>使用文档内容</emph>，然后单击<emph>新建</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>使用文档内容</emph>」，然后点击「<emph>新建</emph>」。" #: indices_literature.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7606,7 +7606,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153738\n" "help.text" msgid "Type a name for the bibliography entry in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Short name</item> box." -msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">简称</item>」框中键入参考文献条目的名称。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">简称</item>」框中输入参考文献条目的名称。" #: indices_literature.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7614,7 +7614,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153763\n" "help.text" msgid "Select the publication source for the record in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Type</item> box, and then add additional information in the remaining boxes." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>框中选择记录的出版物来源，然后在其余的框中添加其他信息。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>」框中选择记录的出版物来源，然后在其余的框中添加其他信息。" #: indices_literature.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7622,7 +7622,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3146873\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: indices_literature.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7630,7 +7630,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3146897\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert Bibliography Entry</item> dialog, click <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert</item>, and then <item type=\"menuitem\">Close</item>." -msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入参考文献条目</item>」对话框中，单击「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>」，然后单击「<item type=\"menuitem\">关闭</item>」。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入参考文献条目</item>」对话框中，点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>」，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">关闭</item>」。" #: indices_literature.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7646,7 +7646,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3148402\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry." -msgstr "在文档中要添加文献条目的位置单击。" +msgstr "在文档中要添加文献条目的位置点击。" #: indices_literature.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7662,7 +7662,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153231\n" "help.text" msgid "Select <emph>From bibliography database</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>使用文献数据库</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>使用文献数据库</emph>」。" #: indices_literature.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7678,7 +7678,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147085\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then click <emph>Close</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>插入</emph>，然后单击<emph>关闭</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>插入</emph>」，然后点击「<emph>关闭</emph>」。" #: indices_literature.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7726,7 +7726,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155872\n" "help.text" msgid "There are several ways to create an index that spans several documents:" -msgstr "您可以通过以下几种方法创建覆盖多个文档的索引：" +msgstr "您可以通过以下几种方法创建覆盖多个文档的索引:" #: indices_multidoc.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7782,7 +7782,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150942\n" "help.text" msgid "The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as \"Heading 1\", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. After you apply these styles, you can then create a table of contents." -msgstr "生成目录的最佳方式是：对要包括在目录的段落应用预设的标题段落样式（如“标题 1”）。应用这些样式之后，就可以开始创建目录。" +msgstr "生成目录的最佳方式是: 对要包括在目录的段落应用预设的标题段落样式（如「标题 1」）。应用这些样式之后，就可以开始创建目录。" #: indices_toc.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7798,7 +7798,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150510\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents." -msgstr "在文档中要创建目录的位置单击。" +msgstr "在文档中要创建目录的位置点击。" #: indices_toc.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7814,7 +7814,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153746\n" "help.text" msgid "Select \"Table of Contents\" in the <emph>Type</emph> box." -msgstr "在<emph>类型</emph>框中选择“目录”。" +msgstr "在「<emph>类型</emph>」框中选择「目录」。" #: indices_toc.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7830,7 +7830,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3146872\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: indices_toc.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7854,7 +7854,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153161\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: indices_toc.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7862,7 +7862,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153183\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click in the table of contents and choose <emph>Update Index or Table of Contents</emph>." -msgstr "在目录中单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>更新索引/目录</emph>。" +msgstr "在目录中点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>更新索引/目录</emph>」。" #: indices_toc.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7934,7 +7934,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154248\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <item type=\"menuitem\">New User-defined Index</item> button next to the <item type=\"menuitem\">Index</item> box." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">索引</item>框旁边的<item type=\"menuitem\">新建使用者自定目录</item>按钮。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">索引</item>框旁边的<item type=\"menuitem\">新建使用者自定目录</item>」按钮。" #: indices_userdef.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7942,7 +7942,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155886\n" "help.text" msgid "Type a name for the index in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Name</item> box and click <item type=\"menuitem\">OK</item>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">名称</item>框中键入索引的名称，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">确定</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">名称</item>框中输入索引的名称，然后点击<item type=\"menuitem\">确定</item>」。" #: indices_userdef.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7950,7 +7950,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147114\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert</item> to add the selected word(s) to the new index." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>将选定单词添加到新索引中。" +msgstr "点击<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>将选中单词添加到新索引中。" #: indices_userdef.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7958,7 +7958,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147139\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <item type=\"menuitem\">Close</item>." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>」。" #: indices_userdef.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -7974,7 +7974,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150933\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in the document where you want to insert the index." -msgstr "在文档中要插入索引的位置单击。" +msgstr "在文档中要插入索引的位置点击。" #: indices_userdef.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8006,7 +8006,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3146897\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: indices_userdef.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8118,7 +8118,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155914\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in the document where you want to insert the graphic." -msgstr "在文档中要插入图形的位置单击。" +msgstr "在文档中要插入图形的位置点击。" #: insert_graphic_dialog.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8134,7 +8134,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156021\n" "help.text" msgid "Locate the graphic file that you want to insert, and then click <emph>Open</emph>." -msgstr "找到要插入的图形文件，然后单击「<emph>打开</emph>」。" +msgstr "找到要插入的图形文件，然后点击「<emph>打开</emph>」。" #: insert_graphic_dialog.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8142,7 +8142,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153396\n" "help.text" msgid "By default, the inserted graphic is centered above the paragraph that you clicked in." -msgstr "默认情况下，插入的图形会在您单击的段落上方居中放置。" +msgstr "默认情况下，插入的图形会在您点击的段落上方居中放置。" #: insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8198,7 +8198,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153396\n" "help.text" msgid "In the spreadsheet, click the chart. Eight handles appear." -msgstr "请单击以选中图表。被选中的图表具有 8 个控点。" +msgstr "请点击以选中图表。被选中的图表具有 8 个控点。" #: insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8262,7 +8262,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145098\n" "help.text" msgid "Hold down <item type=\"keycode\">Ctrl</item> and click and hold the object for a moment." -msgstr "按住 <item type=\"keycode\">Ctrl</item> 键，然后单击并按住对象片刻。" +msgstr "按住 <item type=\"keycode\">Ctrl</item> 键，然后点击并按住对象片刻。" #: insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8358,7 +8358,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155915\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in the document where you want to insert the scanned image." -msgstr "在文档中要插入扫描图像的位置单击。" +msgstr "在文档中要插入扫描图像的位置点击。" #: insert_graphic_scan.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8406,7 +8406,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155909\n" "help.text" msgid "To move a numbered or bulleted paragraph down one outline level, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and then press Tab." -msgstr "要将带编号或项目符号的段落降低一个大纲级别，请在段落的起始位置单击，然后按 Tab 键。" +msgstr "要将带编号或项目符号的段落降低一个大纲级别，请在段落的起始位置点击，然后按 Tab 键。" #: insert_tab_innumbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8414,7 +8414,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155859\n" "help.text" msgid "To move a numbered or bulleted paragraph up one outline level, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and then press Shift+Tab." -msgstr "要将带编号或项目符号的段落提高一个大纲级别，请在段落的起始位置单击，然后按 Shift+Tab 键。" +msgstr "要将带编号或项目符号的段落提高一个大纲级别，请在段落的起始位置点击，然后按 Shift+Tab 键。" #: insert_tab_innumbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8422,7 +8422,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153403\n" "help.text" msgid "To insert a tab between the number or bullet and the paragraph text, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and then press <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Tab." -msgstr "要在编号或项目符号与段落文字之间插入制表符，请在段落的起始位置单击，然后按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Tab 键。" +msgstr "要在编号或项目符号与段落文字之间插入制表符，请在段落的起始位置点击，然后按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Tab 键。" #: join_numbered_lists.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8478,7 +8478,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155911\n" "help.text" msgid "On the <item type=\"menuitem\">Formatting</item> Bar, click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Numbering On/Off</item> icon twice." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">格式化</item>栏中，单击<item type=\"menuitem\">显示/隐藏编号</item>图标两次。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式化</item>」栏中，点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">显示/隐藏编号</item>」图标两次。" #: join_numbered_lists.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8486,7 +8486,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3155870\n" "help.text" msgid "To Create a Numbered List From Non-consecutive Paragraphs:" -msgstr "从不连续的段落创建编号列表" +msgstr "从不连续的段落创建编号列表:" #: join_numbered_lists.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8510,7 +8510,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145102\n" "help.text" msgid "On the <item type=\"menuitem\">Formatting</item> Bar, click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Numbering On/Off</item> icon twice." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">格式化</item>栏中，单击<item type=\"menuitem\">显示/隐藏编号</item>图标两次。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式化</item>」栏中，点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">显示/隐藏编号</item>」图标两次。" #: jump2statusbar.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8542,7 +8542,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155178\n" "help.text" msgid "To go to a specific bookmark in your document, <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">hold down Ctrl and click </caseinline><defaultinline>right-click</defaultinline></switchinline> in the <emph>Page</emph> field on the <emph>Status Bar</emph>, and then choose the bookmark." -msgstr "要移到文档中特定书签的位置，<switchinline select=\"sys\"> <caseinline select=\"MAC\">请按住 Ctrl 键，并单击 </caseinline> <defaultinline>用鼠标右键单击 </defaultinline> </switchinline><emph>状态栏</emph> 上的<emph>页面</emph>字段，然后选择书签。" +msgstr "要移到文档中特定书签的位置，<switchinline select=\"sys\"> <caseinline select=\"MAC\">请按住 Ctrl 键，并点击 </caseinline> <defaultinline>用鼠标右键点击 </defaultinline> </switchinline><emph>状态栏</emph> 上的<emph>页面</emph>字段，然后选择书签。" #: jump2statusbar.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8590,7 +8590,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155186\n" "help.text" msgid "To open a context menu, press Shift+F10. To close a context menu, press Escape." -msgstr "要打开上下文菜单，请按 Shift+F10 键。要关闭上下文菜单，请按 Esc 键。" +msgstr "要打开右键菜单，请按 Shift+F10 键。要关闭右键菜单，请按 Esc 键。" #: keyboard.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8606,7 +8606,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN106AA\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>View - Toolbars - Insert</emph> to open the <emph>Insert</emph> toolbar." -msgstr "选择<emph>视图 - 工具栏 - 插入</emph>打开<emph>插入</emph>工具栏。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>视图 - 工具栏 - 插入</emph>」打开「<emph>插入</emph>」工具栏。" #: keyboard.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8622,7 +8622,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149630\n" "help.text" msgid "Press the right arrow key until the <emph>Section</emph> icon is selected." -msgstr "按向右键，直到选定<emph>段落</emph>图标。" +msgstr "按向右键，直到选中<emph>段落</emph>图标。" #: keyboard.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8670,7 +8670,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154849\n" "help.text" msgid "Press the right arrow key until the <emph>Table</emph> icon is selected." -msgstr "按向右键，直到选定<emph>表格</emph>图标。" +msgstr "按向右键，直到选中<emph>表格</emph>图标。" #: keyboard.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8758,7 +8758,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10703\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the arrow next to the <emph>New Style from Selection</emph> icon to open the submenu." -msgstr "单击<emph>选中的新样式</emph>图标旁边的箭头以打开子菜单。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>选中的新样式</emph>」图标旁边的箭头以打开子菜单。" #: load_styles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8766,7 +8766,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149632\n" "help.text" msgid "Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replace styles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select <emph>Overwrite</emph>." -msgstr "使用对话框底部的复选框选择要导入的样式类型。要替换当前文档中与导入样式同名的样式，请选择<emph>改写</emph>。" +msgstr "使用对话框底部的复选框选择要导入的样式类型。要替换当前文档中与导入样式同名的样式，请选择「<emph>改写</emph>」。" #: load_styles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8774,7 +8774,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145098\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: load_styles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8782,7 +8782,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156240\n" "help.text" msgid "Click an entry in the <emph>Categories</emph> list, then click the template containing the styles that you want to use in the <emph>Templates</emph> list, and then click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "点击 <emph>分类</emph> 列表中的条目，然后在<emph>模板</emph>列表点击含有您想要使用的样式的模板，然后点击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>分类</emph> 列表中的条目，然后在「<emph>模板</emph>」列表点击含有您想要使用的样式的模板，然后点击<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: load_styles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8790,7 +8790,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153377\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>From File</emph>, locate the file containing the styles that you want to use, and then click name, and then click <emph>Open</emph>." -msgstr "点击<emph>来自文件</emph>，定位到含有您想要样式的文件，然后点击名称，然后点击<emph>打开</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>来自文件</emph>」，定位到含有您想要样式的文件，然后点击名称，然后点击「<emph>打开</emph>」。" #: main.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -8958,7 +8958,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154247\n" "help.text" msgid "To open the <emph>Navigator</emph>, press F5." -msgstr "要打开<emph>导航器</emph>，请按 F5 键。" +msgstr "要打开「<emph>导航器</emph>」，请按 F5 键。" #: navigator.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9006,7 +9006,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id4685201\n" "help.text" msgid "To create text that is not to be printed do the following:" -msgstr "要创建非打印的文本，执行以下操作：" +msgstr "要创建非打印的文本，执行以下操作:" #: nonprintable_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9014,7 +9014,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149789\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert - Frame</item> and click <item type=\"menuitem\">OK</item>." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 框架</item>，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">确定</item>。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 框架</item>」，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">确定</item>」。" #: nonprintable_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9046,7 +9046,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150320\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: nonprintable_text.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9094,7 +9094,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149966\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: number_date_conv.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9102,7 +9102,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155919\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click in a table cell and choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Number recognition</item>. When this feature is on, a check mark is displayed in front of the <item type=\"menuitem\">Number recognition</item> command." -msgstr "右键单击表格单元格，然后选择<item type=\"menuitem\">数字识别</item>。启用此功能时，选中标记会显示在<item type=\"menuitem\">数字识别</item>命令的前面。" +msgstr "右键点击表格单元格，然后选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">数字识别</item>」。启用此功能时，选中标记会显示在<item type=\"menuitem\">数字识别</item>命令的前面。" #: number_date_conv.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9110,7 +9110,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155527\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</caseinline><defaultinline>Tools - Options</defaultinline></switchinline> - <item type=\"menuitem\">%PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table</item>, and select or clear the <item type=\"menuitem\">Number recognition</item> check box." -msgstr "选择<switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">%PRODUCTNAME - 首选项</caseinline><defaultinline>工具 - 选项</defaultinline></switchinline> - <item type=\"menuitem\">%PRODUCTNAME Writer - 表格</item>，然后选择或清除<item type=\"menuitem\">数字识别</item>复选框。" +msgstr "选择<switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">%PRODUCTNAME - 偏好设置</caseinline><defaultinline>工具 - 选项</defaultinline></switchinline> - <item type=\"menuitem\">%PRODUCTNAME Writer - 表格</item>，然后选择或清除<item type=\"menuitem\">数字识别</item>复选框。" #: number_date_conv.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9118,7 +9118,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153415\n" "help.text" msgid "<switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</caseinline><defaultinline>Tools - Options</defaultinline></switchinline> - <link href=\"text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp\" name=\"Text Document - Table\">%PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table</link>" -msgstr "<switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">%PRODUCTNAME - 首选项</caseinline><defaultinline>工具 - 选项</defaultinline></switchinline> - <link href=\"text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp\" name=\"Text Document - Table\">%PRODUCTNAME Writer - 表格</link>" +msgstr "<switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">%PRODUCTNAME - 偏好设置</caseinline><defaultinline>工具 - 选项</defaultinline></switchinline> - <link href=\"text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp\" name=\"Text Document - Table\">%PRODUCTNAME Writer - 表格</link>" #: number_sequence.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9158,7 +9158,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149829\n" "help.text" msgid "Type the text that you want to assign numbering to, for example, \"Quotation Number \"." -msgstr "键入要对其指定编号的文字，例如“引文编号”。" +msgstr "输入要对其指定编号的文字，例如「引文编号」。" #: number_sequence.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9166,7 +9166,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155048\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert - Field - More Fields</item>, and then click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Variables</item> tab." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 字段 - 其他</item>，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">变量</item>选项卡。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 字段 - 其他</item>」，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">变量</item>」选项卡。" #: number_sequence.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9174,7 +9174,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156240\n" "help.text" msgid "Click \"Number range\" in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Type</item> list." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>列表中的“编号顺序”。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>」列表中的「编号顺序」。" #: number_sequence.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9182,7 +9182,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153363\n" "help.text" msgid "Type \"Quotation\" in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Name</item> box." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">名称</item>框中键入“Quotation”。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">名称</item>」框中输入「Quotation」。" #: number_sequence.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9190,7 +9190,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153387\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: number_sequence.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9198,7 +9198,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154250\n" "help.text" msgid "Type a number in the <emph>Value</emph> box, or leave the box empty to use automatic numbering." -msgstr "在 <emph>值</emph> 框中输入数字，或者留空使用自动编号。" +msgstr "在「<emph>值</emph>」框中输入数字，或者留空使用自动编号。" #: number_sequence.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9206,7 +9206,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154851\n" "help.text" msgid "Select the outline level where you want the numbering to restart in the <emph>Level </emph>box." -msgstr "在<emph>级别</emph>框中选择您想要重新开始编号的边框级别。" +msgstr "在「<emph>级别</emph>」框中选择您想要重新开始编号的边框级别。" #: number_sequence.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9214,7 +9214,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155886\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>插入</emph>，然后单击<emph>关闭</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>插入</emph>」，然后点击「<emph>关闭</emph>」。" #: numbering_lines.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9246,7 +9246,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149842\n" "help.text" msgid "$[officename] can insert line numbers in an entire document or to selected paragraphs in your document. Line numbers are included when you print your document. You can specify the line numbering interval, the starting line number, and whether to count blank lines or lines in frames. You can also add a separator between line numbers." -msgstr "$[officename] 可以在整个文档或文档中选定的段落中插入行号。打印文档时包括行号。可以设置行号间距、起始行编号、以及是否计算空行或框架中的行。也可以在行编号之间添加分隔符。" +msgstr "$[officename] 可以在整个文档或文档中选中的段落中插入行号。打印文档时包括行号。可以设置行号间距、起始行编号以及是否计算空行或框架中的行。也可以在行编号之间添加分隔符。" #: numbering_lines.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9270,7 +9270,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149640\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Tools - Line Numbering</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>工具 - 行编号</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>工具 - 行编号</emph>」。" #: numbering_lines.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9278,7 +9278,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149612\n" "help.text" msgid "Select <emph>Show numbering</emph>, and then select the options that you want." -msgstr "选择<emph>显示编号</emph>，然后选择所需的选项。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>显示编号</emph>」，然后选择所需的选项。" #: numbering_lines.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9286,7 +9286,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145101\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: numbering_lines.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9302,7 +9302,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156264\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Tools - Line Numbering</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>工具 - 行编号</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>工具 - 行编号</emph>」。" #: numbering_lines.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9310,7 +9310,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153385\n" "help.text" msgid "Select <emph>Show numbering</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>显示编号</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>显示编号</emph>」。" #: numbering_lines.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9326,7 +9326,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154853\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click the \"Default\" paragraph style and choose <emph>Modify</emph>." -msgstr "在“默认”段落样式中单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>修改</emph>。" +msgstr "在「默认」段落样式中点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>修改</emph>」。" #: numbering_lines.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9334,7 +9334,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150222\n" "help.text" msgid "All paragraph styles are based on the \"Default\" style." -msgstr "所有的段落样式都以“默认”样式为基础。" +msgstr "所有的段落样式都以「默认」样式为基础。" #: numbering_lines.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9358,7 +9358,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150520\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: numbering_lines.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9390,7 +9390,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153758\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: numbering_lines.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9414,7 +9414,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150703\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in a paragraph." -msgstr "在段落中单击。" +msgstr "在段落中点击。" #: numbering_lines.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9446,7 +9446,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153779\n" "help.text" msgid "Enter a line number in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Start with</item> box." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">开始从</item>框中输入行编号。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">开始从</item>」框中输入行编号。" #: numbering_lines.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9454,7 +9454,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153804\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: numbering_lines.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9526,7 +9526,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3145107\n" "help.text" msgid "To Remove the Number From a Paragraph in a Numbered List" -msgstr "删除编号列表中段落的编号：" +msgstr "删除编号列表中段落的编号" #: numbering_paras.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9534,7 +9534,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156248\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in front of the first character of the paragraph that you want to remove the numbering from." -msgstr "在要删除编号的段落的第一个字符之前单击。" +msgstr "在要删除编号的段落的第一个字符之前点击。" #: numbering_paras.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9542,7 +9542,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153366\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: numbering_paras.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9558,7 +9558,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154248\n" "help.text" msgid "To remove the number and the indent of the paragraph, click the <emph>Numbering on/off</emph> icon on the <emph>Formatting</emph> Bar. If you save the document in HTML format, a separate numbered list is created for the numbered paragraphs that follow the current paragraph." -msgstr "要同时移除数字与段落缩进，请点击 <emph>格式</emph> 工具栏的 <emph>编号开/关</emph> 图标。如果您以 HTML 格式保存文档，将为当前段落后的已编号段落创建单独的编号列表。" +msgstr "要同时移除数字与段落缩进，请点击「<emph>格式</emph>」工具栏的 <emph>编号开/关</emph> 图标。如果您以 HTML 格式保存文档，将为当前段落后的已编号段落创建单独的编号列表。" #: numbering_paras.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9566,7 +9566,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3154856\n" "help.text" msgid "To Change the Number That a Numbered List Starts With" -msgstr "修改编号列表的起始编号：" +msgstr "修改编号列表的起始编号" #: numbering_paras.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9574,7 +9574,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155877\n" "help.text" msgid "Click anywhere in the numbered list." -msgstr "单击编号列表中的任意位置。" +msgstr "点击编号列表中的任意位置。" #: numbering_paras.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9582,7 +9582,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155895\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Format - Bullets and Numbering</emph>, and then click the <emph>Options</emph> tab." -msgstr "选择<emph>格式 - 项目符号和编号</emph>，然后单击<emph>选项</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>格式 - 项目符号和编号</emph>」，然后点击「<emph>选项</emph>」选项卡。" #: numbering_paras.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9598,7 +9598,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147116\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: numbering_paras.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9646,7 +9646,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153402\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in your document where you want the new page to begin." -msgstr "在文档中要开始新页的位置单击。" +msgstr "在文档中要开始新页的位置点击。" #: page_break.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9654,7 +9654,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153119\n" "help.text" msgid "Press Ctrl+Enter." -msgstr "单击 Ctrl+Enter 键。" +msgstr "点击 Ctrl+Enter 键。" #: page_break.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9670,7 +9670,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149641\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in front of the first character on the page that follows the manual page break." -msgstr "在手动分页之后的页面上的第一个字符前单击。" +msgstr "在手动分页之后的页面上的第一个字符前点击。" #: page_break.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9694,7 +9694,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145111\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click in the table, and choose <emph>Table</emph>." -msgstr "在表格中单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>表格</emph>。" +msgstr "在表格中点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>表格</emph>」。" #: page_break.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9774,7 +9774,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1082F\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon." -msgstr "单击<emph>页面样式</emph>图标。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>页面样式</emph>」图标。" #: pagebackground.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9782,7 +9782,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10837\n" "help.text" msgid "In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose <emph>New</emph>." -msgstr "在页面样式列表中，右键单击其中一项，然后选择<emph>新建</emph>。" +msgstr "在页面样式列表中，右键点击其中一项，然后选择「<emph>新建</emph>」。" #: pagebackground.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9790,7 +9790,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1083F\n" "help.text" msgid "On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab page, type a name for the page style in the <emph>Name</emph> box." -msgstr "在<emph>管理器</emph>选项卡页面中的<emph>名称</emph>框内键入页面样式的名称。" +msgstr "在「<emph>管理器</emph>」选项卡页面中的<emph>名称</emph>框内输入页面样式的名称。" #: pagebackground.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9798,7 +9798,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1084B\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page." -msgstr "在<emph>下一个样式</emph>框中，选择要应用到下一页面的页面样式。" +msgstr "在「<emph>下一个样式</emph>」框中，选择要应用到下一页面的页面样式。" #: pagebackground.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9806,7 +9806,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10855\n" "help.text" msgid "To only apply the new page style to a single page, select \"Default\"." -msgstr "要仅对单个页面应用新页面样式，请选择“默认”。" +msgstr "要仅对单个页面应用新页面样式，请选择「默认」。" #: pagebackground.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9822,7 +9822,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1085F\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Background</emph> tab." -msgstr "单击<emph>背景</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>背景</emph>」选项卡。" #: pagebackground.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9838,7 +9838,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1086B\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: pagebackground.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9870,7 +9870,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1089A\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon." -msgstr "单击<emph>页面样式</emph>图标。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>页面样式</emph>」图标。" #: pagebackground.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9902,7 +9902,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN108BD\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page background." -msgstr "在要修改页面背景的段落的第一个字符前单击鼠标。" +msgstr "在要修改页面背景的段落的第一个字符前点击鼠标。" #: pagebackground.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9910,7 +9910,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN108C1\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 手动分页</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 手动分页</emph>」。" #: pagebackground.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9918,7 +9918,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN108C9\n" "help.text" msgid "Select <emph>Page break</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>分页</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>分页</emph>」。" #: pagebackground.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9926,7 +9926,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN108D1\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Style</item> box, select a page style that uses the page background." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">样式</item>框中，选择使用页面背景的页面样式。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">样式</item>」框中，选择使用页面背景的页面样式。" #: pagebackground.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9934,7 +9934,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN108DB\n" "help.text" msgid "To change the background of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to \"Default\"." -msgstr "要仅更改当前页面的背景，请选择下一样式选项设为“默认”的页面样式。" +msgstr "要仅更改当前页面的背景，请选择下一样式选项设为「默认」的页面样式。" #: pagebackground.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -9958,7 +9958,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN108E8\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: pagenumbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10014,7 +10014,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id6604510\n" "help.text" msgid "If you see the text \"Page number\" instead of the number, choose <emph>View - Field names</emph>." -msgstr "如果看到文本“页码”而不是数字，请选择<emph>视图 - 字段名称</emph>。" +msgstr "如果看到文本「页码」而不是数字，请选择「<emph>视图 - 字段名称</emph>」。" #: pagenumbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10054,7 +10054,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id5757621\n" "help.text" msgid "Click into the first paragraph of your document." -msgstr "单击文档的第一个段落。" +msgstr "点击文档的第一个段落。" #: pagenumbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10070,7 +10070,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id4395275\n" "help.text" msgid "In the Breaks area, enable <emph>Insert</emph>. Enable <emph>With Page Style</emph> just to be able to set the new <emph>Page number</emph>. Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "在「换行符」区域，启用「<emph>插入</emph>」。启用「<emph>使用页面样式</emph>」以便设置新的「<emph>页码</emph>」。单击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" +msgstr "在「换行符」区域，启用「<emph>插入</emph>」。启用「<emph>使用页面样式</emph>」以便设置新的「<emph>页码</emph>」。点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: pagenumbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10094,7 +10094,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id9029206\n" "help.text" msgid "You want roman page numbers running i, ii, iii, iv, and so on." -msgstr "您需要以下格式的罗马数字页码：i、ii、iii、iv 等等。" +msgstr "您需要以下格式的罗马数字页码: i、ii、iii、iv 等等。" #: pagenumbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10110,7 +10110,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id9139378\n" "help.text" msgid "Select a number format and click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "选择一种数字格式，然后单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "选择一种数字格式，然后点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: pagenumbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10150,7 +10150,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id6138492\n" "help.text" msgid "An <emph>automatic page break</emph> appears at the end of a page when the page style has a different \"next style\"." -msgstr "当页面样式具有不同的“下一个样式”，将在页面结尾显示<emph>自动分页符</emph>。" +msgstr "当页面样式具有不同的「下一个样式」，将在页面结尾显示<emph>自动分页符</emph>。" #: pagenumbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10190,7 +10190,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1911679\n" "help.text" msgid "It depends on your document what is best: to use a manually inserted page break between page styles, or to use an automatic change. If you just need one title page with a different style than the other pages, you can use the automatic method:" -msgstr "这取决于文档最适于：使用在页面样式之间手动插入的分页符，还是使用自动修改。如果只需要一个样式与其他页面不同的标题页面，则可以使用自动方法：" +msgstr "这取决于文档最适于: 使用在页面样式之间手动插入的分页符，还是使用自动修改。如果只需要一个样式与其他页面不同的标题页面，则可以使用自动方法:" #: pagenumbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10206,7 +10206,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id4473403\n" "help.text" msgid "Click into the first page of your document." -msgstr "单击文档的首页。" +msgstr "点击文档的首页。" #: pagenumbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10230,7 +10230,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id4191717\n" "help.text" msgid "Double-click the \"First Page\" style." -msgstr "双击“首页”样式。" +msgstr "双击「首页」样式。" #: pagenumbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10238,7 +10238,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id2318796\n" "help.text" msgid "Now your title page has the style \"First Page\", and the next pages automatically have the \"Default\" style." -msgstr "现在，标题页面具有“首页”样式，后续的页面自动具有“默认”样式。" +msgstr "现在，标题页面具有「首页」样式，后续的页面自动具有「默认」样式。" #: pagenumbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10262,7 +10262,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7588732\n" "help.text" msgid "Click at the start of the first paragraph on the page where a different page style will be applied." -msgstr "单击将应用不同页面样式的页面上的第一个段落的开头。" +msgstr "点击将应用不同页面样式的页面上的第一个段落的开头。" #: pagenumbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10270,7 +10270,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id95828\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>. You see the <emph>Insert Break</emph> dialog." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 手动分隔符</emph>。将会看到<emph>插入分隔符</emph>对话框。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 手动分隔符</emph>」。将会看到<emph>插入分隔符</emph>对话框。" #: pagenumbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10278,7 +10278,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3496200\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Style</item> list box, select a page style. You may set a new page number, too. Click <item type=\"menuitem\">OK</item>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">样式</item>列表框中，选择一种页面样式。也可以设置新页码。单击<item type=\"menuitem\">确定</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">样式</item>列表框中，选择一种页面样式。也可以设置新页码。点击<item type=\"menuitem\">确定</item>」。" #: pagenumbers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10286,7 +10286,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7599108\n" "help.text" msgid "The selected page style will be used from the current paragraph to the next page break with style. You may need to create the new page style first." -msgstr "将从当前段落到下一个具有样式的分页符之间使用选定的页面样式。您可能需要先创建新的“页面样式”。" +msgstr "将从当前段落到下一个具有样式的分页符之间使用选中的页面样式。您可能需要先创建新的「页面样式」。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10318,7 +10318,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id6418042\n" "help.text" msgid "All page properties for Writer text documents, like for example the page orientation, are defined by page styles. By default, a new text document uses the “Default” page style for all pages. If you open an existing text document, different page styles may have been applied to the different pages." -msgstr "Writer 文本文档的所有页面属性由页面样式定义，例如页面的方向。默认情况下，一个新的文本文档为所有页面采用“默认”页面样式。如果您打开一个已有的文本文档，不同的页面也许应用了不同的页面样式。" +msgstr "Writer 文本文档的所有页面属性由页面样式定义，例如页面的方向。默认情况下，一个新的文本文档为所有页面采用「默认」页面样式。如果您打开一个已有的文本文档，不同的页面也许应用了不同的页面样式。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10326,7 +10326,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id8324533\n" "help.text" msgid "It is important to know that changes that you apply to a page property will only affect the pages that use the current page style. The current page style is listed in the Status Bar at the lower window border." -msgstr "重要的是，您应用到页面属性的更改将只会影响使用当前页面样式的页面。当前页面样式会显示在窗口底部边框的“状态栏”上。" +msgstr "重要的是，您应用到页面属性的更改将只会影响使用当前页面样式的页面。当前页面样式会显示在窗口底部边框的「状态栏」上。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10342,7 +10342,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id6307260\n" "help.text" msgid "If your text document consists only of pages with the same page style, you can change the page properties directly:" -msgstr "如果您的文本文档只存在相同的一个页面样式，您可以直接改变页面属性：" +msgstr "如果您的文本文档只存在相同的一个页面样式，您可以直接改变页面属性:" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10350,7 +10350,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id5256508\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Format - Page</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>格式 - 页面</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>格式 - 页面</emph>」。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10358,7 +10358,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id9681997\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Page</emph> tab." -msgstr "单击<emph>页</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>页</emph>」选项卡。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10366,7 +10366,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7994323\n" "help.text" msgid "Under <item type=\"menuitem\">Paper format</item>, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">纸张格式</item>下，选择“纵向”或“横向”。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">纸张格式</item>」下，选择「纵向」或「横向」。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10374,7 +10374,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7069002\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10390,7 +10390,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1071D\n" "help.text" msgid "$[officename] uses page styles to specify the orientation of the pages in a document. Page styles define more page properties, as for example header and footer or page margins. You can either change the “Default” page style for the current document, or you can define own page styles and apply those page styles to any parts of your text." -msgstr "在文档中，$[officename] 使用页面样式来指定页面的方向。页面样式定义了多个页面属性，例如页眉、页脚或页边距。您可以为当前文档改变“默认”页面样式，也可以定义自己的页面样式并将其应用到文本的任意部分。" +msgstr "在文档中，$[officename] 使用页面样式来指定页面的方向。页面样式定义了多个页面属性，例如页眉、页脚或页边距。您可以为当前文档改变「默认」页面样式，也可以定义自己的页面样式并将其应用到文本的任意部分。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10414,7 +10414,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id2962126\n" "help.text" msgid "To change the page orientation for all pages that share the same page style, you first need a page style, then apply that style:" -msgstr "要改变共用同一页面样式的所有页面的方向，您首先需要一个页面样式，然后应用那个样式。" +msgstr "要同时改变多个风格一致的页面的方向，您首先需要一个页面样式，然后应用那个样式:" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10430,7 +10430,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10741\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon." -msgstr "单击<emph>页面样式</emph>图标。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>页面样式</emph>」图标。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10438,7 +10438,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10749\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click a page style and choose <emph>New</emph>. The new page style initially gets all properties of the selected page style." -msgstr "在一个页面样式上，单击鼠标右键，并选择<emph>新建</emph>。该新页面样式立刻获得所选页面样式的全部属性。" +msgstr "在一个页面样式上，点击鼠标右键，并选择「<emph>新建</emph>」。该新页面样式立刻获得所选页面样式的全部属性。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10446,7 +10446,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10751\n" "help.text" msgid "On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab page, type a name for the page style in the <emph>Name</emph> box, for example \"My Landscape\"." -msgstr "在<emph>管理器</emph>选项卡页面的<emph>名称</emph>框中，键入页面样式的名称，例如，“My Landscape”。" +msgstr "在「<emph>管理器</emph>」选项卡页面的<emph>名称</emph>框中，输入页面样式的名称，例如，「My Landscape」。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10454,7 +10454,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1075D\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page that follows a page with the new style. See the section about the scope of page styles at the end of this help page." -msgstr "在<emph>下一个样式</emph>列表框中，选择想要应用到下一页的页面样式，后续页面将应用新的样式。请参阅帮助页面结束位置关于页面样式的作用范围的段落。" +msgstr "在「<emph>下一个样式</emph>」列表框中，选择想要应用到下一页的页面样式，后续页面将应用新的样式。请参阅帮助页面结束位置关于页面样式的作用范围的段落。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10462,7 +10462,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10775\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>Page</emph> tab." -msgstr "单击<emph>页</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>页</emph>」选项卡。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10470,7 +10470,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1077D\n" "help.text" msgid "Under <item type=\"menuitem\">Paper format</item>, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">纸张格式</item>下，选择“纵向”或“横向”。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">纸张格式</item>」下，选择「纵向」或「横向」。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10478,7 +10478,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN108AE\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10518,7 +10518,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id5169225\n" "help.text" msgid "A page style can be defined to span one page only. The “First Page” style is an example. You set this property by defining another page style to be the \"next style\", on the <item type=\"menuitem\">Format - Page - Organizer</item> tab page." -msgstr "一个页面样式可以定义为仅涵盖一个页面。“首页”样式就是一个例子。您可以在<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 页面 - 管理</item>选项卡页面中通过将另一个页面样式定义为“下一个样式”样式来设置该属性。" +msgstr "一个页面样式可以定义为仅涵盖一个页面。「首页」样式就是一个例子。您可以在「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 页面 - 管理</item>」选项卡页面中通过将另一个页面样式定义为「下一个样式」样式来设置该属性。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10534,7 +10534,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id2118594\n" "help.text" msgid "To insert a manual page break at the cursor position, press <item type=\"keycode\">Ctrl+Enter</item> or choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert - Manual Break</item> and just click OK." -msgstr "要在光标位置插入一个手动分页符，按 <item type=\"keycode\">Ctrl+Enter</item> 或者选择<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 手动换行</item>然后单击“确定”。" +msgstr "要在光标位置插入一个手动分页符，按 <item type=\"keycode\">Ctrl+Enter</item> 或者选择<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 手动换行</item>然后点击「确定」。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10550,7 +10550,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id6386913\n" "help.text" msgid "The “Default” page style does not set a different \"next style\" on the <item type=\"menuitem\">Format - Page - Organizer</item> tab page. Instead, the \"next style\" is set also to be “Default”. All page styles that are followed by the same page style can span multiple pages. The lower and upper borders of the page style range are defined by \"page breaks with style\". All the pages between any two \"page breaks with style\" use the same page style." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 页面 - 管理</item>选项卡页面中，<emph>默认</emph>页面样式没有设置不同的“下一个样式”。或者说，“下一个样式”也设置为“默认”。采用相同页面样式的所有页码样式都能够涵盖多个页面。一个页面样式区域的上下边界由“带样式的分页符”定义。在任两个“带样式的分页符”之间的所有页面使用同一个页面样式。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 页面 - 管理</item>」选项卡页面中，「默认」页面样式没有设置不同的「下一个样式」。或者说，「下一个样式」也设置为「默认」。采用相同页面样式的所有页码样式都能够涵盖多个页面。一个页面样式区域的上下边界由「带样式的分页符」定义。在任两个「带样式的分页符」之间的所有页面使用同一个页面样式。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10558,7 +10558,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id6062196\n" "help.text" msgid "You can insert a \"page break with style\" directly at the cursor position. Alternatively, you can apply the \"page break with style\" property to a paragraph or to a paragraph style." -msgstr "您可以直接在光标位置插入一个“带样式的分页符”。或者，您可以将“带样式的分页符”属性应用到一个段落或段落样式中。" +msgstr "您可以直接在光标位置插入一个「带样式的分页符」。或者，您可以将「带样式的分页符」属性应用到一个段落或段落样式中。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10566,7 +10566,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id6054261\n" "help.text" msgid "Perform any one of the following commands:" -msgstr "执行以下任意一个命令：" +msgstr "执行以下任意一个命令:" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10574,7 +10574,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1811578\n" "help.text" msgid "To insert a \"page break with style\" at the cursor position, choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert - Manual Break</item>, select a <emph>Style</emph> name from the listbox, and click OK." -msgstr "要在光标位置插入一个「带样式的分页符」，选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 手动分页</item>」，从列表框中选择一个「<emph>样式</emph>」名称，然后单击「确定」。" +msgstr "要在光标位置插入一个「带样式的分页符」，选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 手动分页</item>」，从列表框中选择一个「<emph>样式</emph>」名称，然后点击「确定」。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10590,7 +10590,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id4753868\n" "help.text" msgid "To apply the \"page break with style\" property to the current paragraph style, right-click the current paragraph. Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Edit Paragraph Style</item> from the context menu. Click the <emph>Text Flow</emph> tab. In the Breaks area, activate <emph>Enable</emph> and <emph>With Page Style</emph>. Select a page style name from the listbox." -msgstr "要将「带样式的分页符」属性应用到当前段落样式，请在当前段落上单击鼠标右键。从上下文菜单中选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">编辑段落样式</item>」。单击「<emph>文字流</emph>」选项卡。在「换行符」区域，激活「<emph>启用</emph>」和「<emph>使用页面样式</emph>」，在列表框内选择一个页面样式的名称。" +msgstr "要将「带样式的分页符」属性应用到当前段落样式，请在当前段落上点击鼠标右键。从右键菜单中选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">编辑段落样式</item>」。点击「<emph>文字流</emph>」选项卡。在「换行符」区域，激活「<emph>启用</emph>」和「<emph>使用页面样式</emph>」，在列表框内选择一个页面样式的名称。" #: pageorientation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10670,7 +10670,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149614\n" "help.text" msgid "On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab, type a name in the <emph>Name</emph> box." -msgstr "在<emph>管理器</emph>选项卡上的<emph>名称</emph>框中键入名称。" +msgstr "在「<emph>管理器</emph>」选项卡上的<emph>名称</emph>框中输入名称。" #: pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10678,7 +10678,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145110\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10686,7 +10686,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156252\n" "help.text" msgid "To apply the custom page style to a single page, select the default page style that is used in your document in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box." -msgstr "要将自定义页面样式应用到单个页面，请在<emph>下一样式</emph>框中选择文档中使用的默认页面样式。" +msgstr "要将自定义页面样式应用到单个页面，请在「<emph>下一样式</emph>」框中选择文档中使用的默认页面样式。" #: pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10694,7 +10694,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153376\n" "help.text" msgid "To apply the custom page style to more than one page, select its name in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box. To stop using the style, insert a manual page break and assign it a different page style." -msgstr "要将自定义页面样式应用到多个页面，请在<emph>下一样式</emph>框中选择其名称。要停止使用该样式，请手动插入换页符兵将其分配给其他页面样式。" +msgstr "要将自定义页面样式应用到多个页面，请在「<emph>下一样式</emph>」框中选择其名称。要停止使用该样式，请手动插入换页符兵将其分配给其他页面样式。" #: pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10702,7 +10702,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154252\n" "help.text" msgid "Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "使用对话框中的选项卡设置页面样式的版式选项，然后单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "使用对话框中的选项卡设置页面样式的版式选项，然后点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10718,7 +10718,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154873\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in the page that you want to apply the page style to." -msgstr "在要应用页面样式的页面中单击。" +msgstr "在要应用页面样式的页面中点击。" #: pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10750,7 +10750,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147122\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in the document where you want a new page to start." -msgstr "在文档中要开始新页的位置单击。" +msgstr "在文档中要开始新页的位置点击。" #: pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10758,7 +10758,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150210\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 手动分页</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 手动分页</emph>」。" #: pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10766,7 +10766,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150235\n" "help.text" msgid "Select <emph>Page break</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>分页</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>分页</emph>」。" #: pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10774,7 +10774,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150939\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Style</item> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the page that follows the manual break." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">样式</item>框中，选择要应用于手动分页符之后的页面的页面样式。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">样式</item>」框中，选择要应用于手动分页符之后的页面的页面样式。" #: pagestyles.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10782,7 +10782,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150965\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: print_brochure.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10838,7 +10838,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10621\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>File - Print</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>文件 - 打印</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>文件 - 打印</emph>」。" #: print_brochure.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10846,7 +10846,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN106B6\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>Print</emph> dialog, click <emph>Properties</emph>." -msgstr "在<emph>打印</emph>对话框中，单击<emph>属性</emph>。" +msgstr "在「<emph>打印</emph>对话框中，点击<emph>属性</emph>」。" #: print_brochure.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10862,7 +10862,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id8947416\n" "help.text" msgid "If your printer prints duplex, and because brochures always print in landscape mode, you should use the \"duplex - short edge\" setting in your printer setup dialog." -msgstr "如果打印机进行双面打印，并且由于小册子始终以横向模式打印，因此，应该在打印机设置对话框中使用“双面打印 - 短边”设置。" +msgstr "如果打印机进行双面打印，并且由于小册子始终以横向模式打印，因此，应该在打印机设置对话框中使用「双面打印 - 短边」设置。" #: print_brochure.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10870,7 +10870,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10628\n" "help.text" msgid "Return to <emph>Print</emph> dialog, and click the <emph>Page Layout</emph> tab page." -msgstr "返回<emph>打印</emph>对话框，然后单击<emph>页面版式</emph>选项卡页面。" +msgstr "返回<emph>打印</emph>对话框，然后点击「<emph>页面版式</emph>」选项卡页面。" #: print_brochure.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10878,7 +10878,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1062C\n" "help.text" msgid "Select <emph>Brochure</emph>." -msgstr "选择【<emph>小册子</emph>】。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>小册子</emph>」。" #: print_brochure.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10886,7 +10886,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10740\n" "help.text" msgid "For a printer that automatically prints on both sides of a page, specify to include \"All pages\"." -msgstr "对于自动双面打印的打印机，请指定包含“所有页”。" +msgstr "对于自动双面打印的打印机，请指定包含「所有页」。" #: print_brochure.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10894,7 +10894,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10630\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: print_brochure.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10902,7 +10902,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN106EA\n" "help.text" msgid "If %PRODUCTNAME prints the pages in the wrong order, open the <emph>Options</emph> tab page, select <emph>Print in reverse page order</emph>, and then print the document again." -msgstr "如果 %PRODUCTNAME 按错误的顺序打印页面，请打开<emph>选项</emph>选项卡页面，选择<emph>逆页序打印</emph>，然后重新打印文档。" +msgstr "如果 %PRODUCTNAME 按错误的顺序打印页面，请打开「<emph>选项</emph>」选项卡页面，选择「<emph>逆页序打印</emph>」，然后重新打印文档。" #: print_preview.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -10998,7 +10998,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149829\n" "help.text" msgid "On the <emph>Page Layout</emph> tab page of the <item type=\"menuitem\">File - Print</item> dialog, you have the option to print multiple pages on one sheet." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">文件 - 打印</item>对话框中的<emph>页面版式</emph>选项卡页面，您可以选择将多个页面打印到一张纸上。" +msgstr "在<emph></emph><item type=\"menuitem\">文件 - 打印</item>对话框中的「页面版式」选项卡页面，您可以选择将多个页面打印到一张纸上。" #: print_small.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11006,7 +11006,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156098\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>File - Print</emph> and click the <emph>Page Layout</emph> tab." -msgstr "选择<emph>文件 - 打印</emph>，然后单击<emph>页面版式</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>文件 - 打印</emph>」，然后点击「<emph>页面版式</emph>」选项卡。" #: print_small.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11014,7 +11014,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155055\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: print_small.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11022,7 +11022,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149603\n" "help.text" msgid "To print two pages side by side on the same sheet, select \"2\" in the <emph>Pages per sheet</emph> box." -msgstr "要将两页并排打印在同一页上，请在<emph>每张纸中的页面</emph>框中选择\"2\"。" +msgstr "要将两页并排打印在同一页上，请在「<emph>每张纸中的页面</emph>」框中选择\"2\"。" #: print_small.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11038,7 +11038,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154841\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Print</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>打印</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>打印</emph>」。" #: print_small.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11094,7 +11094,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156108\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Page Styles</item> icon." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">页面样式</item>图标。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">页面样式</item>」图标。" #: printer_tray.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11102,7 +11102,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155066\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click the page style in the list that you want to specify the paper source for, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>." -msgstr "在列表中要指定纸张来源的页面样式上单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>修改</emph>。" +msgstr "在列表中要指定纸张来源的页面样式上点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>修改</emph>」。" #: printer_tray.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11110,7 +11110,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153416\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Paper tray</item> box, select the paper tray that you want to use." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">纸张来源</item>框中，选择要使用的纸张来源。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">纸张来源</item>」框中，选择要使用的纸张来源。" #: printer_tray.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11118,7 +11118,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153140\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: printer_tray.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11174,7 +11174,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155854\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>File - Print</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>文件 - 打印</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>文件 - 打印</emph>」。" #: printing_order.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11182,7 +11182,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149836\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <emph>General</emph> tab." -msgstr "单击<emph>常规</emph>选项卡。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>常规</emph>」选项卡。" #: printing_order.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11190,7 +11190,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156106\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Print in reverse page order</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>逆页序打印</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>逆页序打印</emph>」。" #: printing_order.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11198,7 +11198,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153418\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Print</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>打印</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>打印</emph>」。" #: printing_order.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11590,7 +11590,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153125\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Cross-reference</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 交叉引用</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 交叉引用</emph>」。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11598,7 +11598,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149634\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Type</item> list, select “Set Reference”." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>列表中，选择“设置引用”。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">类型</item>」列表中，选择「设置引用」。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11606,7 +11606,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149614\n" "help.text" msgid "Type a name for the target in the <emph>Name</emph> box. The selected text is displayed in the <emph>Value</emph> box." -msgstr "在<emph>名称</emph>框中键入该目标的名称。选定的文字显示在<emph>值</emph>框中。" +msgstr "在「<emph>名称</emph>」框中输入该目标的名称。选中的文字显示在「<emph>值</emph>」框中。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11614,7 +11614,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145110\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert</item>. The name of the target is added to the <item type=\"menuitem\">Selection</item> list." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>。目标的名称会添加到<item type=\"menuitem\">选择</item>列表中。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入</item>」。目标的名称会添加到<item type=\"menuitem\">选择</item>列表中。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11646,7 +11646,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7796868\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Cross-reference</emph> to open the dialog, if it is not open already." -msgstr "如果没有打开的话，选择<emph>插入 - 交叉引用</emph>打开对话框。" +msgstr "如果没有打开的话，选择「<emph>插入 - 交叉引用</emph>」打开对话框。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11654,7 +11654,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153392\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>Type</emph> list, select \"Insert Reference\"." -msgstr "在<emph>类型</emph>列表中，选择“插入引用”。" +msgstr "在「<emph>类型</emph>」列表中，选择「插入引用」。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11662,7 +11662,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154256\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>Selection</emph> list, select the target that you want to cross-reference." -msgstr "在<emph>选择</emph>列表中，选择要交叉引用的目标。" +msgstr "在「<emph>选择</emph>」列表中，选择要交叉引用的目标。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11670,7 +11670,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154856\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>Insert reference to</emph> list, select the format for the cross-reference. The <link href=\"text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp\" name=\"format\">format</link> specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, \"Reference\" inserts the target text, and \"Page\" inserts the page number where the target is located. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted." -msgstr "在<emph>插入引用至</emph>列表中，选择交叉引用的格式。<link href=\"text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp\" name=\"format\">格式</link>用于指定显示为交叉引用的信息类型。例如，选择“引用”插入目标文字，而选择“页”则插入目标所在页的页码。对于脚注，插入该脚注的编号。" +msgstr "在「<emph>插入引用至</emph>」列表中，选择交叉引用的格式。<link href=\"text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp\" name=\"format\">格式</link>用于指定显示为交叉引用的信息类型。例如，选择「引用」插入目标文字，而选择「页」则插入目标所在页的页码。对于脚注，插入该脚注的编号。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11678,7 +11678,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155895\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Insert</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>插入</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>插入</emph>」。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11686,7 +11686,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3148685\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Close</emph> when finished." -msgstr "完成选择后，单击<emph>关闭</emph>。" +msgstr "完成选择后，点击「<emph>关闭</emph>」。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11710,7 +11710,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147123\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in the document where you want to insert the cross-reference." -msgstr "在文档中要插入交叉引用的位置单击。" +msgstr "在文档中要插入交叉引用的位置点击。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11718,7 +11718,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150212\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Cross-reference</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 交叉引用</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 交叉引用</emph>」。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11726,7 +11726,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150236\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>Type</emph> list, select the caption category of the object." -msgstr "在<emph>类型</emph>列表中，选择该对象的标题类别。" +msgstr "在「<emph>类型</emph>」列表中，选择该对象的标题类别。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11734,7 +11734,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150942\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>Selection</emph> list, select the caption number of the object that you want to cross-reference." -msgstr "在<emph>选择</emph>列表中，选择要交叉引用的对象的标题编号。" +msgstr "在「<emph>选择</emph>」列表中，选择要交叉引用的对象的标题编号。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11742,7 +11742,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150968\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>Insert reference to</emph> list, select the format of the cross-reference. The <link href=\"text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp\" name=\"format\">format</link> specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, \"Reference\" inserts the caption category and caption text of the object." -msgstr "在<emph>插入引用到</emph>列表中，选择交叉引用的格式。<link href=\"text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp\" name=\"format\">格式</link>用来指定显示为交叉引用的信息的类型。例如，“引用”插入对象的标题类别和标题文字。" +msgstr "在「<emph>插入引用到</emph>」列表中，选择交叉引用的格式。<link href=\"text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp\" name=\"format\">格式</link>用来指定显示为交叉引用的信息的类型。例如，「引用」插入对象的标题类别和标题文字。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11750,7 +11750,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150535\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Insert</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>插入</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>插入</emph>」。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11758,7 +11758,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3151092\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Close</emph> when finished." -msgstr "完成选择后，单击<emph>关闭</emph>。" +msgstr "完成选择后，点击「<emph>关闭</emph>」。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11774,7 +11774,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153594\n" "help.text" msgid "To manually update the cross-references in a document, choose <emph>Tools - Update - Fields</emph> from the menu or press F9." -msgstr "要手动更新文档中的交叉引用，请选择菜单中的“<emph>工具 - 更新 - 字段</emph>”或按 F9。" +msgstr "要手动更新文档中的交叉引用，请选择菜单中的「<emph>工具 - 更新 - 字段</emph>」或按 F9。" #: references.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11814,7 +11814,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153132\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in front of the cross-reference that you want to modify." -msgstr "在要修改的交叉引用前单击。" +msgstr "在要修改的交叉引用前点击。" #: references_modify.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11822,7 +11822,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149632\n" "help.text" msgid "If you cannot see the field shading of the cross-reference, choose <emph>View - Field Shadings</emph> or press <emph>Ctrl+F8</emph>." -msgstr "如果无法看到交叉引用的字段阴影，请选择<emph>视图 - 字段阴影</emph>或按 <emph>Ctrl+F8</emph> 键。" +msgstr "如果无法看到交叉引用的字段阴影，请选择「<emph>视图 - 字段阴影</emph>」或按 <emph>Ctrl+F8</emph> 键。" #: references_modify.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11830,7 +11830,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149611\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Edit - Fields</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>编辑 - 字段</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>编辑 - 字段</emph>」。" #: references_modify.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11838,7 +11838,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145101\n" "help.text" msgid "Set the options that you want, and then click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "设置所需的选项，然后单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "设置所需的选项，然后点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: references_modify.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11894,7 +11894,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10669\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Format - Page - Page</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>格式 - 页 - 页</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>格式 - 页 - 页</emph>」。" #: registertrue.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11902,7 +11902,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10671\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Register-true</item> section, select the <item type=\"menuitem\">Activate</item> checkbox and click <item type=\"menuitem\">OK</item>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">正反页的行距</item>中，选择<item type=\"menuitem\">激活</item>复选框，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">确定</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">正反页的行距</item>中，选择<item type=\"menuitem\">激活</item>复选框，然后点击<item type=\"menuitem\">确定</item>」。" #: registertrue.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11918,7 +11918,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1067B\n" "help.text" msgid "To Exempt Paragraphs From Register-True Printing" -msgstr "禁用段落的“正反页的行距相等”打印" +msgstr "禁用段落的「正反页的行距相等」打印" #: registertrue.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11926,7 +11926,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10682\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: registertrue.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11934,7 +11934,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10685\n" "help.text" msgid "Select all the paragraphs you want to exempt, then choose <emph>Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing</emph>." -msgstr "选中所有无需此设置的段落，然后选择<emph>格式 - 段落 - 缩进和间距</emph>。" +msgstr "选中所有无需此设置的段落，然后选择「<emph>格式 - 段落 - 缩进和间距</emph>」。" #: registertrue.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11950,7 +11950,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10698\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>Register-true</emph> section, clear the <emph>Activate</emph> checkbox." -msgstr "在<emph>正反页的行距相等</emph>中，取消选择<emph>激活</emph>复选框。" +msgstr "在「<emph>正反页的行距相等</emph>」中，取消选择<emph>激活</emph>复选框。" #: registertrue.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11990,7 +11990,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155858\n" "help.text" msgid "Use the AutoCorrect feature to remove line breaks that occur within sentences. Unwanted line breaks can occur when you copy text from another source and paste it into a text document." -msgstr "使用“自动更正”功能删除句子中出现的换行符。当您将其他数据源中的文本复制并粘贴到某一文本文档中时，可能会出现多余的换行符。" +msgstr "使用「自动更正」功能删除句子中出现的换行符。当您将其他数据源中的文本复制并粘贴到某一文本文档中时，可能会出现多余的换行符。" #: removing_line_breaks.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -11998,7 +11998,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153413\n" "help.text" msgid "This AutoCorrect feature only works on text that is formatted with the \"Default\" paragraph style." -msgstr "“自动更正”功能仅对格式化为“默认”段落样式的文本有效。" +msgstr "「自动更正」功能仅对格式化为「默认」段落样式的文本有效。" #: removing_line_breaks.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12006,7 +12006,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153138\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options</item>." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正选项</item>。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正选项</item>」。" #: removing_line_breaks.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12014,7 +12014,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149645\n" "help.text" msgid "On the <emph>Options</emph> tab, ensure that <emph>Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than 50%</emph> is selected. To change the minimum percentage for the line length, double-click the option in the list, and then enter a new percentage." -msgstr "在<emph>选项</emph>选项卡中，请确保选中了<emph>合并单行段落，如果长度大于 50%</emph>。要修改行长度的最小百分比，请双击列表中的此选项，然后输入新的百分比。" +msgstr "在「<emph>选项</emph>」选项卡中，请确保选中了<emph>合并单行段落，如果长度大于 50%</emph>。要修改行长度的最小百分比，请双击列表中的此选项，然后输入新的百分比。" #: removing_line_breaks.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12022,7 +12022,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145093\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: removing_line_breaks.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12038,7 +12038,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156253\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Apply Style</item> box on the <item type=\"menuitem\">Formatting</item> bar, choose “Default”." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">格式</item>栏中的<item type=\"menuitem\">应用样式</item>框中，选择“默认值”。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式</item>」栏中的<item type=\"menuitem\">应用样式</item>框中，选择「默认值」。" #: removing_line_breaks.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12078,7 +12078,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154091\n" "help.text" msgid "You can quickly exit manual formatting by pressing Ctrl+Shift+X. For example, if you have pressed Ctrl+B to apply the bold typeface to the text that you type, press Ctrl+Shift+X to return to the default character format of the paragraph." -msgstr "按 Ctrl+Shift+X 键可以快速退出手动格式。例如，按 Ctrl+B 组合键在键入的文字中应用粗体字形之后，再按 Ctrl+Shift+X 键，文字格式将返回段落的默认字符格式。" +msgstr "按 Ctrl+Shift+X 键可以快速退出手动格式。例如，按 Ctrl+B 组合键在输入的文字中应用粗体字形之后，再按 Ctrl+Shift+X 键，文字格式将返回段落的默认字符格式。" #: reset_format.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12166,7 +12166,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1067D\n" "help.text" msgid "To show or hide rulers, choose <emph>View - Ruler</emph>. To show the vertical ruler, choose <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</caseinline><defaultinline>Tools - Options</defaultinline></switchinline> - <link href=\"text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp\" name=\"Writer - View\"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME Writer - View</emph></link>, and then select <emph>Vertical ruler</emph> in the <emph>Ruler</emph> area." -msgstr "要显示或隐藏标尺，选择<emph>视图 - 标尺</emph>。要显示垂直标尺，请选择 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">%PRODUCTNAME - 首选项</caseinline><defaultinline>工具 - 选项</defaultinline></switchinline> - <link href=\"text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp\" name=\"Writer - View\"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME Writer - 视图</emph></link>，然后在<emph>标尺</emph>区域选择<emph>垂直标尺</emph>。" +msgstr "要显示或隐藏标尺，选择「<emph>视图 - 标尺</emph>」。要显示垂直标尺，请选择 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">%PRODUCTNAME - 偏好设置</caseinline><defaultinline>工具 - 选项</defaultinline></switchinline> - <link href=\"text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp\" name=\"Writer - View\"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME Writer - 视图</emph></link>，然后在「<emph>标尺</emph>区域选择<emph>垂直标尺</emph>」。" #: ruler.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12214,7 +12214,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145769\n" "help.text" msgid "To change the first line indent of a selected paragraph, drag the top left triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location." -msgstr "要修改选定段落的首行缩进，请将水平标尺左上的三角形拖到新的位置。" +msgstr "要修改选中段落的首行缩进，请将水平标尺左上的三角形拖到新的位置。" #: ruler.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12270,7 +12270,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155907\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Edit - Find & Replace</item>." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">编辑 - 查找和替换</item>。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">编辑 - 查找和替换</item>」。" #: search_regexp.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12278,7 +12278,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id2142399\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <item type=\"menuitem\">More Options</item> to expand the dialog." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">更多选项</item>展开对话框。" +msgstr "点击<item type=\"menuitem\">更多选项</item>展开对话框。" #: search_regexp.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12302,7 +12302,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156113\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <item type=\"menuitem\">Find Next</item> or <item type=\"menuitem\">Find All</item>." -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">查找下一个</item>或<item type=\"menuitem\">查找全部</item>。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">查找下一个</item>」或<item type=\"menuitem\">查找全部</item>。" #: search_regexp.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12326,7 +12326,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153136\n" "help.text" msgid "The wildcard for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: \"123*\" finds \"12\" \"123\", and \"1233\"." -msgstr "代表零或更多之前字符串的通配符是星号。例如：\"123*\" 可以找到 \"12\"、\"123\" 以及 \"1233\"。" +msgstr "代表零或更多之前字符串的通配符是星号。例如: \"123*\" 可以找到 \"12\"、\"123\" 以及 \"1233\"。" #: search_regexp.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12414,7 +12414,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149848\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Section</item> list, click the section you want to modify. You can press <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A to select all sections in the list, and you can Shift+click or <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+click to select some sections." -msgstr "在 <item type=\"menuitem\">区域</item> 列表，点击想要修改的区域。您可以按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A 选择列表中的全部区域，然后可以按 Shift+click 或 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+click 再选择一些区域。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">区域</item>」列表，点击想要修改的区域。您可以按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A 选择列表中的全部区域，然后可以按 Shift+click 或 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+click 再选择一些区域。" #: section_edit.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12422,7 +12422,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153397\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: section_edit.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12430,7 +12430,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153120\n" "help.text" msgid "To convert a section into normal text, click <emph>Remove</emph>." -msgstr "要将区域转换为普通文本，请点击<emph>移除</emph>。" +msgstr "要将区域转换为普通文本，请点击「<emph>移除</emph>」。" #: section_edit.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12502,7 +12502,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3155863\n" "help.text" msgid "To Insert a New Section" -msgstr "插入新区域：" +msgstr "插入新区域" #: section_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12510,7 +12510,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149843\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in your document where you want to insert a new section, or select the text that you want to convert to a section." -msgstr "在文档中要插入新区域的位置单击，或者选择要转换成区域的文字。" +msgstr "在文档中要插入新区域的位置点击，或者选择要转换成区域的文字。" #: section_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12518,7 +12518,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156103\n" "help.text" msgid "If you select a text that occurs within a paragraph, the text is automatically converted into a new paragraph." -msgstr "如果选定的文字在段落中，则该文字将自动转换成新的段落。" +msgstr "如果选中的文字在段落中，则该文字将自动转换成新的段落。" #: section_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12526,7 +12526,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149281\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 区域</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 区域</emph>」。" #: section_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12534,7 +12534,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153404\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">New Section</item> box, type a name for the section." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">新建区域</item>框中，键入区域的名称。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">新建区域</item>」框中，输入区域的名称。" #: section_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12542,7 +12542,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153127\n" "help.text" msgid "Set the options for the section, and then click <emph>Insert</emph>." -msgstr "设置区域选项，然后单击<emph>插入</emph>。" +msgstr "设置区域选项，然后点击「<emph>插入</emph>」。" #: section_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12566,7 +12566,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149611\n" "help.text" msgid "When you open a document that contains linked sections, $[officename] prompts you to update the contents of the sections. To manually update a link, choose <emph>Tools - Update - Links</emph>." -msgstr "如果打开的文档含有链接的区域，$[officename] 将提示您更新区域的内容。要手动更新链接，请选择<emph>工具 - 更新 - 链接</emph>。" +msgstr "如果打开的文档含有链接的区域，$[officename] 将提示您更新区域的内容。要手动更新链接，请选择「<emph>工具 - 更新 - 链接</emph>」。" #: section_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12582,7 +12582,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145104\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in your document where you want to insert the linked section." -msgstr "在文档中要插入链接区域的位置单击。" +msgstr "在文档中要插入链接区域的位置点击。" #: section_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12590,7 +12590,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156241\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 区域</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 区域</emph>」。" #: section_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12598,7 +12598,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153363\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">New Section</item> box, type a name for the section." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">新建区域</item>框中，键入区域的名称。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">新建区域</item>」框中，输入区域的名称。" #: section_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12606,7 +12606,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153387\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Link</item> area, select the <item type=\"menuitem\">Link</item> check box. <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"WIN\">Under Windows, you can also select the <item type=\"menuitem\">DDE</item> check box to automatically update the contents of the section when the section in the source document is changed. </caseinline></switchinline>" -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">链接</item>区域中，选中<emph>链接</emph>复选框。<switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"WIN\">在 Windows 下，也可以选中 <item type=\"menuitem\">DDE</item> 复选框，以便在源文档中的区域发生变化时自动更新区域的内容。</caseinline></switchinline>" +msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">链接</item>区域中，选择<item type=\"menuitem\">链接</item>复选框。<switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"WIN\">在 Windows 下，也可以选中 <item type=\"menuitem\">DDE</item> 复选框，以便在源文档中的区域发生变化时自动更新区域的内容。</caseinline></switchinline>" #: section_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12622,7 +12622,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155882\n" "help.text" msgid "Locate the document containing the section that you want to link to, and then click <emph>Insert</emph>." -msgstr "找到含有要链接的区域的文档，然后单击<emph>插入</emph>。" +msgstr "找到含有要链接的区域的文档，然后点击「<emph>插入</emph>」。" #: section_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12630,7 +12630,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149978\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Section</item> box, select the section that you want to insert." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">区域</item>框中，选择要插入的区域。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">区域</item>」框中，选择要插入的区域。" #: section_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12638,7 +12638,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150003\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Insert</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>插入</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>插入</emph>」。" #: sections.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12670,7 +12670,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153128\n" "help.text" msgid "Sections are named blocks of text, including graphics or objects, that you can use in a number of ways:" -msgstr "区域是已命名的文字块（包括图形或对象），其使用方式有很多种：" +msgstr "区域是已命名的文字块（包括图形或对象），其使用方式有很多种:" #: sections.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12726,7 +12726,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153367\n" "help.text" msgid "To insert a new paragraph immediately before or after a section, click in front or behind the section, and then press <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Option </caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+Enter." -msgstr "要在区域之前或之后紧接着插入新段落，请在区域的前面或后面单击，然后按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Option</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+Enter 组合键。" +msgstr "要在区域之前或之后紧接着插入新段落，请在区域的前面或后面点击，然后按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Option</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+Enter 组合键。" #: sections.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12806,7 +12806,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155868\n" "help.text" msgid "Apply one of the default $[officename] heading paragraph styles, for example, \"Heading 1\", to the paragraphs where you want to generate a new HTML page." -msgstr "对要产生新 HTML 页的段落应用一种默认 $[officename] 标题段落样式（如“标题 1”）。" +msgstr "对要产生新 HTML 页的段落应用一种默认 $[officename] 标题段落样式（如「标题 1」）。" #: send2html.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12814,7 +12814,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156100\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>File - Send - Create HTML Document</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>文件 - 发送 - 创建 HTML 文档</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>文件 - 发送 - 创建 HTML 文档</emph>」。" #: send2html.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12822,7 +12822,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149281\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Styles</item> box, select the paragraph style that you want to use to generate a new HTML page." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">样式</item>框中，选择要用于生成新 HTML 页的段落样式。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">样式</item>」框中，选择要用于生成新 HTML 页的段落样式。" #: send2html.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12830,7 +12830,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153407\n" "help.text" msgid "Enter a path and a name for the HTML document, and then click <emph>Save</emph>." -msgstr "为 HTML 文档输入路径和名称，然后单击<emph>保存</emph>。" +msgstr "为 HTML 文档输入路径和名称，然后点击「<emph>保存</emph>」。" #: shortcut_writing.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12838,7 +12838,7 @@ msgctxt "" "tit\n" "help.text" msgid "Applying Text Formatting While You Type" -msgstr "键入时应用文本格式" +msgstr "输入时应用文本格式" #: shortcut_writing.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12846,7 +12846,7 @@ msgctxt "" "bm_id3149689\n" "help.text" msgid "<bookmark_value>text; formatting bold while typing</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>formatting; bold, while typing</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>keyboard;bold formatting</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>bold;formatting while typing</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>shortcut keys;bold formatting</bookmark_value>" -msgstr "<bookmark_value>文本; 键入时设置粗体格式</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>设置格式; 粗体, 键入时</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>键盘;粗体格式</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>粗体;键入时设置格式</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>快捷键;粗体格式</bookmark_value>" +msgstr "<bookmark_value>文本; 输入时设置粗体格式</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>设置格式; 粗体, 输入时</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>键盘;粗体格式</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>粗体;输入时设置格式</bookmark_value><bookmark_value>快捷键;粗体格式</bookmark_value>" #: shortcut_writing.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12854,7 +12854,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3149689\n" "help.text" msgid "<variable id=\"shortcut_writing\"><link href=\"text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp\" name=\"Applying Text Formatting While You Type\">Applying Text Formatting While You Type</link></variable>" -msgstr "<variable id=\"shortcut_writing\"><link href=\"text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp\" name=\"键入时应用文本格式\">键入时应用文本格式</link></variable>" +msgstr "<variable id=\"shortcut_writing\"><link href=\"text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp\" name=\"输入时应用文本格式\">输入时应用文本格式</link></variable>" #: shortcut_writing.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12886,7 +12886,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156112\n" "help.text" msgid "You can also press <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+B, type the text that you want to format in bold, and then press <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+B when you are finished." -msgstr "还可以按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+B 键，键入要应用粗体格式的文字后再按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+B 键。" +msgstr "还可以按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+B 键，输入要应用粗体格式的文字后再按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+B 键。" #: shortcut_writing.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12974,7 +12974,7 @@ msgctxt "" "tit\n" "help.text" msgid "Using Smart Tags" -msgstr "使用“智能标记”" +msgstr "使用「智能标记」" #: smarttags.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -12998,7 +12998,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id368358\n" "help.text" msgid "Smart Tags provide additional information and functionality to specified words in a Writer document. The available features can be different for different Smart Tags extensions." -msgstr "“智能标记”提供其他信息和功能以指定 Writer 文档中的字词。对于不同的“智能标记”扩展，可用的功能可能会不同。" +msgstr "「智能标记」提供其他信息和功能以指定 Writer 文档中的字词。对于不同的「智能标记」扩展，可用的功能可能会不同。" #: smarttags.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13006,7 +13006,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id9298379\n" "help.text" msgid "Installing Smart Tags" -msgstr "安装“智能标记”" +msgstr "安装「智能标记」" #: smarttags.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13014,7 +13014,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1827448\n" "help.text" msgid "Smart Tags can be supplied as <link href=\"text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp\">extensions</link> to %PRODUCTNAME Writer." -msgstr "“智能标记”可以作为<link href=\"text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp\">扩展</link>提供给 %PRODUCTNAME Writer。" +msgstr "「智能标记」可以作为<link href=\"text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp\">扩展</link>提供给 %PRODUCTNAME Writer。" #: smarttags.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13022,7 +13022,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id2508621\n" "help.text" msgid "To install a Smart Tag, do one of the following:" -msgstr "要安装“智能标记”，请按照以下的某种方法进行：" +msgstr "要安装「智能标记」，请按照以下的某种方法进行:" #: smarttags.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13030,7 +13030,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3856013\n" "help.text" msgid "Save the *.oxt extension file to your harddrive, then double-click the *.oxt file in your file manager. Alternatively, in %PRODUCTNAME choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Tools - Extension Manager</item> to open the Extension Manager, click Add and browse to the file." -msgstr "在您的硬盘中保存 *.oxt 扩展文件，然后双击文件管理器中的 *.oxt 文件。另外，在 %PRODUCTNAME 中选择<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 扩展管理器</item>打开“扩展管理器”，单击“添加”并浏览到此文件。" +msgstr "在您的硬盘中保存 *.oxt 扩展文件，然后双击文件管理器中的 *.oxt 文件。另外，在 %PRODUCTNAME 中选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 扩展管理器</item>」打开「扩展管理器」，点击「添加」并浏览到此文件。" #: smarttags.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13038,7 +13038,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id7814264\n" "help.text" msgid "Click a Smart Tag *.oxt file link on a web page and open the link with the default application. This requires a properly configured Web browser." -msgstr "单击 Web 页面上的“智能标记” *.oxt 文件链接并用默认的应用程序打开该链接。此操作需要一个正确配置的 Web 浏览器。" +msgstr "点击 Web 页面上的「智能标记」*.oxt 文件链接并用默认的应用程序打开该链接。此操作需要一个正确配置的 Web 浏览器。" #: smarttags.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13046,7 +13046,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id8142338\n" "help.text" msgid "Smart Tags Menu" -msgstr "“智能标记”菜单" +msgstr "「智能标记」菜单" #: smarttags.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13062,7 +13062,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id192266\n" "help.text" msgid "When you point to a Smart Tag, a tip help informs you to Ctrl-click to open the Smart Tags menu. If you don't use a mouse, position the cursor inside the marked text and open the context menu by Shift+F10." -msgstr "当指向某个“智能标记”时，一个提示帮助会通知您按住 Ctrl 键并单击打开“智能标记”菜单。如果您不使用鼠标，请将光标定位在被标记的文本中并通过 Shift+F10 组合键打开上下文菜单。" +msgstr "当指向某个「智能标记」时，一个提示帮助会通知您按住 Ctrl 键并点击打开「智能标记」菜单。如果您不使用鼠标，请将光标定位在被标记的文本中并通过 Shift+F10 组合键打开右键菜单。" #: smarttags.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13070,7 +13070,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1998962\n" "help.text" msgid "In the Smart Tags menu you see the available actions that are defined for this Smart Tag. Choose an option from the menu. The <item type=\"menuitem\">Smart Tags Options</item> command opens the <link href=\"text/shared/01/06040700.xhp\">Smart Tags</link> page of Tools - Autocorrect Options." -msgstr "在“智能标记”菜单中您可以看到为该“智能标记”定义的可用操作。从菜单中选择某个选项。<item type=\"menuitem\">智能标记选项</item>命令打开“工具”-“自动更正选项”中的<link href=\"text/shared/01/06040700.xhp\">智能标记</link>页面。" +msgstr "在「智能标记」菜单中您可以看到为该「智能标记」定义的可用操作。从菜单中选择某个选项。<item type=\"menuitem\">智能标记选项</item>命令打开「工具」-「自动更正选项」中的<link href=\"text/shared/01/06040700.xhp\">智能标记</link>页面。" #: smarttags.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13078,7 +13078,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id2376476\n" "help.text" msgid "To Enable and Disable Smart Tags" -msgstr "要启用和禁用“智能标记”" +msgstr "要启用和禁用「智能标记」" #: smarttags.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13086,7 +13086,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id349131\n" "help.text" msgid "When you have installed at least one Smart Tags extension, you see the <link href=\"text/shared/01/06040700.xhp\">Smart Tags</link> page in <item type=\"menuitem\">Tools - Autocorrect Options</item>. Use this dialog to enable or disable Smart Tags and to manage the installed tags." -msgstr "当您已经安装了至少一个“智能标记”扩展时，您会在<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正选项</item>中看到<link href=\"text/shared/01/06040700.xhp\">智能标记</link>页面。使用该对话框启用或禁用“智能标记”并管理已安装的标记。" +msgstr "当您已经安装了至少一个「智能标记」扩展时，您会在「工具 - 自动更正选项」中看到「<link href=\"text/shared/01/06040700.xhp\">智能标记</link>」<item type=\"menuitem\"></item>页面。使用该对话框启用或禁用「智能标记」并管理已安装的标记。" #: smarttags.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13094,7 +13094,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1216467\n" "help.text" msgid "Text that is recognized as a Smart Tag is not checked by the automatic spellcheck." -msgstr "自动拼写检查对于被识别为“智能标记”的文本不做检查。" +msgstr "自动拼写检查对于被识别为「智能标记」的文本不做检查。" #: spellcheck_dialog.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13126,7 +13126,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149814\n" "help.text" msgid "You can manually check the spelling and grammar of a text selection or the entire document." -msgstr "您可以手动检查文本选定内容或整个文档的拼写和语法。" +msgstr "您可以手动检查文本选中内容或整个文档的拼写和语法。" #: spellcheck_dialog.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13134,7 +13134,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id0525200902184476\n" "help.text" msgid "To check the spelling and the grammar of a text, the appropriate dictionaries must be installed. For many languages three different dictionaries exist: a spellchecker, a hyphenation dictionary, and a thesaurus. Each dictionary covers one language only. Grammar checkers can be downloaded and installed as extensions. See the <link href=\"https://extensions.libreoffice.org/extension-center?getCategories=Dictionary\">extensions web page</link>." -msgstr "要检查一段文本的拼写与语法，必须安装相应的词典。很多语言有三种不同的词典：拼写检查词典、断词词典，以及同义词词典。每套词典只涉及一种语言。语法检查器可作为扩展下载安装。请参见 <link href=\"https://extensions.libreoffice.org/extension-center?getCategories=Dictionary\">扩展网页</link>。" +msgstr "要检查一段文本的拼写与语法，必须安装相应的词典。很多语言有三种不同的词典: 拼写检查词典、断词词典，以及同义词词典。每套词典只涉及一种语言。语法检查器可作为扩展下载安装。请参见 <link href=\"https://extensions.libreoffice.org/extension-center?getCategories=Dictionary\">扩展网页</link>。" #: spellcheck_dialog.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13142,7 +13142,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149828\n" "help.text" msgid "The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position, or at the beginning of the text selection." -msgstr "拼写检查从光标当前所在的位置或选定文字的起始位置开始。" +msgstr "拼写检查从光标当前所在的位置或选中文字的起始位置开始。" #: spellcheck_dialog.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13150,7 +13150,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155859\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in the document, or select the text that you want to check." -msgstr "在文档中单击，或者选择要检查的文字。" +msgstr "在文档中点击，或者选择要检查的文字。" #: spellcheck_dialog.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13174,7 +13174,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149861\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: spellcheck_dialog.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13182,7 +13182,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145099\n" "help.text" msgid "To accept a correction, click the suggestion, and then click <emph>Correct</emph>." -msgstr "要接受更正，请单击该建议，然后单击<emph>更正</emph>。" +msgstr "要接受更正，请点击该建议，然后点击「<emph>更正</emph>」。" #: spellcheck_dialog.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13254,7 +13254,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153128\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the icon of the style category that you want to apply." -msgstr "单击要应用的样式类别图标。" +msgstr "点击要应用的样式类别图标。" #: stylist_fillformat.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13270,7 +13270,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153371\n" "help.text" msgid "Move the mouse pointer to where you want to apply the style in the document, and click. To apply the style to more than one item, drag to select the items, and then release." -msgstr "将鼠标指针移到文档中要应用该样式的位置并单击。要在多个项目中应用该样式，请拖动鼠标以选择这些项，然后释放鼠标。" +msgstr "将鼠标指针移到文档中要应用该样式的位置并点击。要在多个项目中应用该样式，请拖动鼠标以选择这些项，然后释放鼠标。" #: stylist_fillformat.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13318,7 +13318,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149829\n" "help.text" msgid "To Create a New Style From a Manually Formatted Selection" -msgstr "创建基于手动格式化的选定内容的新样式" +msgstr "创建基于手动格式化的选中内容的新样式" #: stylist_fromselect.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13334,7 +13334,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153402\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the icon of the style category that you want to create." -msgstr "单击要创建的样式类别的图标。" +msgstr "点击要创建的样式类别的图标。" #: stylist_fromselect.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13342,7 +13342,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153119\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in the document where you want to copy the style from, for example, in a paragraph that you applied manual formatting to." -msgstr "在文档中要复制其样式的位置单击，例如，在已应用手动格式的段落中。" +msgstr "在文档中要复制其样式的位置点击，例如，在已应用手动格式的段落中。" #: stylist_fromselect.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13350,7 +13350,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153138\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the arrow next to the <item type=\"menuitem\">New Style from Selection</item> icon and choose <item type=\"menuitem\">New Style from Selection</item> from the submenu" -msgstr "单击<item type=\"menuitem\">从选定内容新建样式</item>图标，并从子菜单中选择<item type=\"menuitem\">从选定内容新建样式</item>" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">从选中内容新建样式</item>」图标，并从子菜单中选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">从选中内容新建样式</item>」" #: stylist_fromselect.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13358,7 +13358,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156260\n" "help.text" msgid "Type a name in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Style Name</item> box." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">样式名称</item>框中键入名称。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">样式名称</item>」框中输入名称。" #: stylist_fromselect.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13366,7 +13366,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154411\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: stylist_fromselect.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13390,7 +13390,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154258\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the icon of the style category that you want to create." -msgstr "单击要创建的样式类别的图标。" +msgstr "点击要创建的样式类别的图标。" #: stylist_fromselect.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13470,7 +13470,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156107\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the icon of the style category that you want to update." -msgstr "单击要更新的样式类别的图标。" +msgstr "点击要更新的样式类别的图标。" #: stylist_update.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13478,7 +13478,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149283\n" "help.text" msgid "In the document, click from where you want to copy the updated style. For example, click a paragraph to which you applied some manual formatting that you want to copy now." -msgstr "在文档中，在你要拷贝的更新样式处单击。例如，单击应用了您想拷贝的手动格式的一个段落。" +msgstr "在文档中，在你要拷贝的更新样式处点击。例如，点击应用了您想拷贝的手动格式的一个段落。" #: stylist_update.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13494,7 +13494,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153119\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the arrow next to the <emph>New Style from Selection</emph> icon and choose <emph>Update Style</emph> from the submenu." -msgstr "单击<emph>选择的新样式</emph>图标旁边的箭头，然后从子菜单中选择<emph>更新样式</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>选择的新样式</emph>」图标旁边的箭头，然后从子菜单中选择「<emph>更新样式</emph>」。" #: stylist_update.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13550,7 +13550,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155865\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: subscript.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13558,7 +13558,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149829\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Format - Character - Position</emph>, and then select <emph>Superscript</emph> or <emph>Subscript</emph>." -msgstr "选择 <emph>格式 - 字符- 位置</emph>，然后选择 <emph>上标</emph> 或 <emph>下标</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>格式 - 字符- 位置</emph>」，然后选择「<emph>上标</emph>」或 <emph>下标</emph>。" #: subscript.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13638,7 +13638,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id6301461\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Table - Merge Cells</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>格式 - 合并单元格</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>格式 - 合并单元格</emph>」。" #: table_cellmerge.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13662,7 +13662,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id4044312\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Table - Split Cells</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>格式 - 拆分单元格</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>格式 - 拆分单元格</emph>」。" #: table_cellmerge.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13790,7 +13790,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155863\n" "help.text" msgid "To delete a whole table, click in the table, and then choose <emph>Table - Delete - Table</emph>." -msgstr "要删除整个表格，单击该表格，然后选择<emph>表格 - 删除 - 表格</emph>。" +msgstr "要删除整个表格，点击该表格，然后选择「<emph>表格 - 删除 - 表格</emph>」。" #: table_delete.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13798,7 +13798,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153415\n" "help.text" msgid "To delete the contents of a table, click in the table, press <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A until all cells are selected, and then press Delete or Backspace." -msgstr "要删除表格的内容，请在表格中单击，按住 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A 组合键直到选定所有单元格，然后按 Delete 键或空格键。" +msgstr "要删除表格的内容，请在表格中点击，按住 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A 组合键直到选中所有单元格，然后按 Delete 键或空格键。" #: table_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13854,7 +13854,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147416\n" "help.text" msgid "On the <emph>Standard</emph> or the <emph>Insert</emph> bar, click the arrow next to the <emph>Table</emph> icon." -msgstr "在“<emph>标准</emph>”或“<emph>插入</emph>”栏点击“<emph>表格</emph>”图标旁边的箭头。" +msgstr "在「<emph>标准</emph>」或「<emph>插入</emph>」栏点击「<emph>表格</emph>」图标旁边的箭头。" #: table_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13910,7 +13910,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145097\n" "help.text" msgid "Select the options that you want, click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "选择所需的其他选项，然后单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "选择所需的其他选项，然后点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: table_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13942,7 +13942,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154395\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Edit - Copy</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>编辑 - 复制</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>编辑 - 复制</emph>」。" #: table_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13950,7 +13950,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154420\n" "help.text" msgid "In your text document, do one of the following:" -msgstr "在文本文档中，执行以下操之一：" +msgstr "在文本文档中，执行以下操之一:" #: table_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13958,7 +13958,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153383\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Edit - Paste</emph>. The cell range is pasted as an OLE object. To edit the contents of the cells, double-click the object." -msgstr "选择 <emph>编辑 - 粘贴</emph>。单元格区间将被粘贴为 OLE 对象。要编辑单元格内容，请双击对象。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>编辑 - 粘贴</emph>」。单元格区间将被粘贴为 OLE 对象。要编辑单元格内容，请双击对象。" #: table_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13966,7 +13966,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154248\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Edit - Paste Special</emph>, and choose from the following options:" -msgstr "选择<emph>编辑 - 选择粘贴</emph>，并执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "选择「<emph>编辑 - 选择粘贴</emph>」，并执行以下操作之一:" #: table_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13982,7 +13982,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154867\n" "help.text" msgid "Is inserted as..." -msgstr "作为...插入" +msgstr "插入为..." #: table_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -13990,7 +13990,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155893\n" "help.text" msgid "$[officename] $[officeversion] Spreadsheet" -msgstr "“$[officename] $[officeversion] 电子表格" +msgstr "「$[officename] $[officeversion] 电子表格" #: table_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14126,7 +14126,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150534\n" "help.text" msgid "Click and hold the mouse button in the selected cells." -msgstr "在选定单元格中单击并按住鼠标键。" +msgstr "在选中单元格中点击并按住鼠标键。" #: table_insert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14134,7 +14134,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147527\n" "help.text" msgid "Drag the selected cells into the text document." -msgstr "将选定的单元格拖到文本文档中。" +msgstr "将选中的单元格拖到文本文档中。" #: table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14198,7 +14198,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153393\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: table_select.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14238,7 +14238,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10614\n" "help.text" msgid "To select a table with the keyboard, move the cursor into the table, and then press <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A until all the cells are selected." -msgstr "要使用键盘选择表格，请将光标移到表格内，然后按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A 组合键，直到选定所有单元格。" +msgstr "要使用键盘选择表格，请将光标移到表格内，然后按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A 组合键，直到选中所有单元格。" #: table_select.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14246,7 +14246,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10633\n" "help.text" msgid "To select a table with the mouse, move the mouse pointer to a position just above and left of the table. The mouse pointer becomes a diagonal arrow. Click to select the table." -msgstr "要使用鼠标选择表格，只需将鼠标指针移到表格左上方的某个位置。此时，鼠标指针变为对角箭头形状。单击鼠标即可选择该表格。" +msgstr "要使用鼠标选择表格，只需将鼠标指针移到表格左上方的某个位置。此时，鼠标指针变为对角箭头形状。点击鼠标即可选择该表格。" #: table_select.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14254,7 +14254,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10637\n" "help.text" msgid "To select a row or column with the mouse, point to a position just left of the row or above the column. The mouse pointer becomes an arrow. Click to select the row or column." -msgstr "要使用鼠标选择行或列，只需将鼠标指向行的左侧或列的上方的某个位置。此时，鼠标指针变为箭头形状。单击鼠标即可选择该行或列。" +msgstr "要使用鼠标选择行或列，只需将鼠标指向行的左侧或列的上方的某个位置。此时，鼠标指针变为箭头形状。点击鼠标即可选择该行或列。" #: table_sizing.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14302,7 +14302,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3146497\n" "help.text" msgid "You can also distribute rows and columns evenly using the icons on the <item type=\"menuitem\">Optimize Size</item> toolbar on the <item type=\"menuitem\">Table</item> Bar." -msgstr "还可以使用 <item type=\"menuitem\">表格</item>栏上<item type=\"menuitem\">优化</item>工具栏中的图标均匀分布行和列。" +msgstr "还可以使用 <item type=\"menuitem\">表格</item>栏上「<item type=\"menuitem\">优化</item>」工具栏中的图标均匀分布行和列。" #: table_sizing.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14326,7 +14326,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149587\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: table_sizing.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14350,7 +14350,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id0918200811260957\n" "help.text" msgid "Hold down <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline> and then click and drag a line to scale all cells right or above the line proportionally." -msgstr "按住 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline> 键，单击并拖拽出一条线，以便将所有单元格按比例排列至该线条的右边或下边。" +msgstr "按住 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline> 键，点击并拖拽出一条线，以便将所有单元格按比例排列至该线条的右边或下边。" #: table_sizing.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14374,7 +14374,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155891\n" "help.text" msgid "You can specify the behavior for the arrow keys by choosing <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table</emph>, and selecting the options that you want in the <emph>Keyboard handling</emph> area." -msgstr "选择<emph><switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">%PRODUCTNAME - 首选项</caseinline><defaultinline>工具 - 选项</defaultinline></switchinline> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - 表格</emph>，然后在<emph>键盘操作</emph>区域中选择所需的选项，可以指定方向键的操作。" +msgstr "选择「<switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - 偏好设置</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>工具 - 选项</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - 表格</emph>」，然后在「<emph>键盘操作</emph>」区域中选择所需的选项，可以指定方向键的操作。" #: table_sizing.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14382,7 +14382,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3149993\n" "help.text" msgid "To Change the Width of a Cell" -msgstr "修改单元格的宽度：" +msgstr "修改单元格的宽度" #: table_sizing.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14422,7 +14422,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3358867\n" "help.text" msgid "To change the width and height of a table, do one of the following:" -msgstr "要更改表格的宽度和高度，请执行以下任一操作：" +msgstr "要更改表格的宽度和高度，请执行以下任一操作:" #: table_sizing.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14430,7 +14430,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id5366679\n" "help.text" msgid "Click inside the table. In the rulers, drag the border between the white and the gray area to resize the table." -msgstr "在表格内单击。在标尺中，拖动白色区域和灰色区域之间的边框以更改表格大小。" +msgstr "在表格内点击。在标尺中，拖动白色区域和灰色区域之间的边框以更改表格大小。" #: table_sizing.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14446,7 +14446,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id5009308\n" "help.text" msgid "To wrap text to the sides of a table, and to arrange two tables next to another, you must insert the tables into a frame. Click inside the table, press <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A twice to select the whole table, then choose <emph>Insert - Frame</emph>." -msgstr "要使文本环绕表格，或者使两个表格相邻，必须将表格插入图文框中。在表格内单击，按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A 组合键两次以选中整个表格，然后选择<emph>插入 - 图文框</emph>。" +msgstr "要使文本环绕表格，或者使两个表格相邻，必须将表格插入图文框中。在表格内点击，按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A 组合键两次以选中整个表格，然后选择「<emph>插入 - 图文框</emph>」。" #: table_sizing.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14582,7 +14582,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149829\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">New Template</item> box, type a name for the new template." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">新建模板</item>框中，键入新模板的名称。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">新建模板</item>」框中，输入新模板的名称。" #: template_create.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14590,7 +14590,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156098\n" "help.text" msgid "Select a template category in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Categories</item> list." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">类别</item>列表中选择模板类别。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">类别</item>」列表中选择模板类别。" #: template_create.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14598,7 +14598,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149281\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: template_create.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14678,7 +14678,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149283\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>New Template</emph> box, type a name for the new template." -msgstr "在<emph>新建模板</emph>框中，键入新样式的名称。" +msgstr "在「<emph>新建模板</emph>」框中，输入新样式的名称。" #: template_default.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14694,7 +14694,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153140\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>File - New - Templates</emph>." -msgstr "选择 <emph>文件 - 新建 - 模板</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>文件 - 新建 - 模板</emph>」。" #: template_default.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14702,7 +14702,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149952\n" "help.text" msgid "Double-click the \"My Templates\" folder." -msgstr "双击“我的模板”目录。" +msgstr "双击「我的模板」目录。" #: template_default.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14710,7 +14710,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149970\n" "help.text" msgid "Click on the template that you created, and click <emph>Set as Default</emph>." -msgstr "单击您建立的模板，然后单击 <emph>设置为默认</emph>。" +msgstr "点击您建立的模板，然后点击「<emph>设置为默认</emph>」。" #: template_default.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14814,7 +14814,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155178\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Format - Object - Text Attributes</item>, and then click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Text Animation</item> tab." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 对象 - 文字属性</item>，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">文本动画</item>选项卡。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 对象 - 文字属性</item>」，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">文本动画</item>」选项卡。" #: text_animation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14822,7 +14822,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149819\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Effect</item> box, select the animation that you want." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">效果</item>框中，选择想要的动画。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">效果</item>」框中，选择想要的动画。" #: text_animation.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14830,7 +14830,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145786\n" "help.text" msgid "Set the properties of the effect, and then click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "设置此效果的属性，然后单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "设置此效果的属性，然后点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: text_capital.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14894,7 +14894,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149841\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: text_capital.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14910,7 +14910,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1120200910485775\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Format - Character</item>, click the Font Effects tab, then select the type of capitalization in the Effects box. \"Capitals\" capitalizes all letters. \"Title\" capitalizes the first letter of each word. \"Small capitals\" capitalizes all letters, but in a reduced font size." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 字符</item>，单击字体效果选项卡，然后在效果框中选择大小写类型。“大写字母”大写所有字母。“首字母大写”大写每个单词的首个字母。“小型大写字母”大写所有字母，但字体缩小。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 字符</item>」，点击字体效果选项卡，然后在效果框中选择大小写类型。「大写字母」大写所有字母。「首字母大写」大写每个单词的首个字母。「小型大写字母」大写所有字母，但字体缩小。" #: text_capital.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14934,7 +14934,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149606\n" "help.text" msgid "Do one of the following:" -msgstr "执行以下操作之一：" +msgstr "执行以下操作之一:" #: text_capital.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14950,7 +14950,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id1120200910490034\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Format - Character</item>, click the Font Effects tab, then select \"Lowercase\" in the Effects box." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 字符</item>，单击字体效果选项卡，然后在效果框中选择“小写字母”。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 字符</item>」，点击字体效果选项卡，然后在效果框中选择「小写字母」。" #: text_centervert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14990,7 +14990,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155868\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Frame</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 框架</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 框架</emph>」。" #: text_centervert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -14998,7 +14998,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3152765\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Anchor</item> area, select <item type=\"menuitem\">To page</item>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">锁定</item>区域中，选择<item type=\"menuitem\">至页面</item>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">锁定</item>区域中，选择<item type=\"menuitem\">至页面</item>」。" #: text_centervert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15014,7 +15014,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156114\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Position</item> area, select \"Center\" in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Horizontal</item> and <item type=\"menuitem\">Vertical</item> boxes." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">位置</item>区域中，选择<item type=\"menuitem\">水平</item>和<item type=\"menuitem\">垂直</item>框中的“中心”。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">位置</item>区域中，选择<item type=\"menuitem\">水平</item>和<item type=\"menuitem\">垂直</item>」框中的「中心」。" #: text_centervert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15022,7 +15022,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153410\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: text_centervert.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15086,7 +15086,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN106A3\n" "help.text" msgid "On the <item type=\"menuitem\">Tools</item> bar, click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Direct Cursor</item> icon <image id=\"img_id3149846\" src=\"cmd/sc_shadowcursor.png\" width=\"0.222in\" height=\"0.222in\"><alt id=\"alt_id3149846\">Icon</alt></image>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">工具</item>栏上，单击<emph>直接定位光标</emph>图标 <image id=\"img_id3149846\" src=\"cmd/sc_shadowcursor.png\" width=\"5.64mm\" height=\"5.64mm\"><alt id=\"alt_id3149846\">图标</alt></image>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">工具</item>」栏上，点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">直接定位光标</item>」图标 <image id=\"img_id3149846\" src=\"cmd/sc_shadowcursor.png\" width=\"0.222in\" height=\"0.222in\"><alt id=\"alt_id3149846\">图标</alt></image>。" #: text_direct_cursor.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15094,7 +15094,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN106C5\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in a free space in the text document. The mouse pointer changes to reflect the alignment that will be applied to the text that you type:" -msgstr "在文本文档中的空白位置单击。鼠标指针将发生变化，以反映键入的文本所应用的对齐方式：" +msgstr "在文本文档中的空白位置点击。鼠标指针将发生变化，以反映输入的文本所应用的对齐方式:" #: text_direct_cursor.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15102,7 +15102,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN106C8\n" "help.text" msgid "<image id=\"img_id5471987\" src=\"media/helpimg/dircursleft.png\" width=\"0.1457in\" height=\"0.3228in\"><alt id=\"alt_id5471987\">Icon</alt></image> Align left" -msgstr "<image id=\"img_id5471987\" src=\"media/helpimg/dircursleft.png\" width=\"3.7mm\" height=\"8.2mm\"><alt id=\"alt_id5471987\">图标</alt></image>左对齐" +msgstr "<image id=\"img_id5471987\" src=\"media/helpimg/dircursleft.png\" width=\"0.1457in\" height=\"0.3228in\"><alt id=\"alt_id5471987\">图标</alt></image>左对齐" #: text_direct_cursor.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15110,7 +15110,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN106E4\n" "help.text" msgid "<image id=\"img_id5730253\" src=\"media/helpimg/dircurscent.png\" width=\"0.2398in\" height=\"0.3228in\"><alt id=\"alt_id5730253\">Icon</alt></image> Centered" -msgstr "<image id=\"img_id5730253\" src=\"media/helpimg/dircurscent.png\" width=\"6.09mm\" height=\"8.2mm\"><alt id=\"alt_id5730253\">图标</alt></image>居中" +msgstr "<image id=\"img_id5730253\" src=\"media/helpimg/dircurscent.png\" width=\"0.2398in\" height=\"0.3228in\"><alt id=\"alt_id5730253\">图标</alt></image> 居中" #: text_direct_cursor.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15118,7 +15118,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10700\n" "help.text" msgid "<image id=\"img_id6953622\" src=\"media/helpimg/dircursright.png\" width=\"0.1563in\" height=\"0.3228in\"><alt id=\"alt_id6953622\">Icon</alt></image> Align right" -msgstr "<image id=\"img_id6953622\" src=\"media/helpimg/dircursright.png\" width=\"3.97mm\" height=\"8.2mm\"><alt id=\"alt_id6953622\">图标</alt></image>右对齐" +msgstr "<image id=\"img_id6953622\" src=\"media/helpimg/dircursright.png\" width=\"0.1563in\" height=\"0.3228in\"><alt id=\"alt_id6953622\">图标</alt></image> 右对齐" #: text_direct_cursor.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15126,7 +15126,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1071D\n" "help.text" msgid "Type your text. %PRODUCTNAME automatically inserts the required number of blank lines, and, if the options are enabled, tabs and spaces." -msgstr "键入文本。%PRODUCTNAME 会自动插入所需的空行数，如果已启用相应的选项，还会自动插入所需数量的制表符和空格。" +msgstr "输入文本。%PRODUCTNAME 会自动插入所需的空行数，如果已启用相应的选项，还会自动插入所需数量的制表符和空格。" #: text_emphasize.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15158,7 +15158,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155922\n" "help.text" msgid "Here are a few examples of how to emphasize text in a document:" -msgstr "以下示例演示了如何在文档中对文字进行强调：" +msgstr "以下示例演示了如何在文档中对文字进行强调:" #: text_emphasize.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15174,7 +15174,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149840\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click in a paragraph, choose <emph>Paragraph, </emph>set the options that you want, for example, the background color, and then click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "在段落中单击鼠标右键，选择<emph>段落</emph>，设置所需的选项，例如背景颜色，然后单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "在段落中点击鼠标右键，选择「<emph>段落</emph>」，设置所需的选项，例如背景颜色，然后点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: text_emphasize.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15182,7 +15182,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150084\n" "help.text" msgid "Select the text, and then choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Insert - Frame</item>." -msgstr "选择文本，然后选择<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 边框</item>。" +msgstr "选择文本，然后选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">插入 - 边框</item>」。" #: text_emphasize.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15190,7 +15190,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id6924649\n" "help.text" msgid "Use the Text tool on the Drawing toolbar." -msgstr "使用“绘图”工具栏上的“文字”工具。" +msgstr "使用「绘图」工具栏上的「文字」工具。" #: text_emphasize.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15198,7 +15198,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN106E7\n" "help.text" msgid "Use Fontwork. To open the Fontwork window, click the Fontwork Gallery icon on the Drawing bar." -msgstr "使用艺术字。要打开“艺术字”窗口，请单击“绘图”栏上的“艺术字”图标。" +msgstr "使用艺术字。要打开「艺术字」窗口，请点击「绘图」栏上的「艺术字」图标。" #: text_frame.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15254,7 +15254,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149602\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Frame</emph>, and click OK." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 框架</emph>，然后单击“确定”。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 框架</emph>」，然后点击「确定」。" #: text_frame.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15270,7 +15270,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149578\n" "help.text" msgid "To edit the contents of a text frame, click in the frame, and make the changes that you want." -msgstr "要编辑文本框的内容，请在框中单击，并根据需要进行修改。" +msgstr "要编辑文本框的内容，请在框中点击，并根据需要进行修改。" #: text_frame.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15278,7 +15278,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156239\n" "help.text" msgid "To edit a frame, select the frame, right-click, and then choose a formatting option. You can also right-click the selected frame, and choose <emph>Frame</emph>." -msgstr "要编辑框架，请选择该框架，单击鼠标右键，然后选择格式选项。也可以在选定的框架上单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>框架</emph>。" +msgstr "要编辑框架，请选择该框架，点击鼠标右键，然后选择格式选项。也可以在选中的框架上点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>框架</emph>」。" #: text_frame.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15286,7 +15286,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156261\n" "help.text" msgid "To resize a text frame, click an edge of the frame, and drag one of the edges or corners of the frame. Hold down Shift while you drag to maintain the proportion of the frame." -msgstr "要调整文本框的大小，请单击框的边缘，并拖动框的一个边缘或角。在拖动时按住 Shift 键，以保持框的比例。" +msgstr "要调整文本框的大小，请点击框的边缘，并拖动框的一个边缘或角。在拖动时按住 Shift 键，以保持框的比例。" #: text_frame.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15326,7 +15326,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155899\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <emph>Properties</emph> area, unmark the <emph>Print</emph> check box and click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "在<emph>属性</emph>区域中，清除<emph>打印</emph>复选框，然后单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "在「<emph>属性</emph>区域中，清除<emph>打印</emph>复选框，然后点击<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: text_frame.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15350,7 +15350,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153025\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the edge of a frame that you want to link. Selection handles appear on the edges of the frame." -msgstr "单击要链接的框架的边缘。选择控点将出现在框架的边缘上。" +msgstr "点击要链接的框架的边缘。选择控点将出现在框架的边缘上。" #: text_frame.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15358,7 +15358,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150223\n" "help.text" msgid "On the <item type=\"menuitem\">Frame</item> Bar, click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Link Frames</item> icon <image id=\"img_id3148968\" src=\"cmd/sc_chainframes.png\" width=\"0.222in\" height=\"0.222in\"><alt id=\"alt_id3148968\">Icon</alt></image>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">边框</item>栏中，单击<item type=\"menuitem\">链接框</item>图标 <image id=\"img_id3148968\" src=\"cmd/sc_chainframes.png\" width=\"0.222in\" height=\"0.222in\"><alt id=\"alt_id3148968\">图标</alt></image>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">边框</item>」栏中，点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">链接框</item>」图标 <image id=\"img_id3148968\" src=\"cmd/sc_chainframes.png\" width=\"0.222in\" height=\"0.222in\"><alt id=\"alt_id3148968\">图标</alt></image>。" #: text_frame.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15366,7 +15366,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150930\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the frame that you want to link to." -msgstr "单击要链接到的框架。" +msgstr "点击要链接到的框架。" #: text_frame.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15374,7 +15374,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150947\n" "help.text" msgid "You can only link frames if:" -msgstr "只能在以下情况下链接框架：" +msgstr "只能在以下情况下链接框架:" #: text_frame.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15430,7 +15430,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id5853144\n" "help.text" msgid "The AutoSize feature is available only for the last frame in a chain of linked frames." -msgstr "“自动调整尺寸”功能只对一系列链接的框架中最后一个框架可用。" +msgstr "「自动调整尺寸」功能只对一系列链接的框架中最后一个框架可用。" #: text_nav_keyb.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15630,7 +15630,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154235\n" "help.text" msgid "Moves the cursor to the end of the document" -msgstr "将光标移到文档的结尾。" +msgstr "将光标移到文档的结尾" #: text_nav_keyb.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15758,7 +15758,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153130\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">View - Toolbars- Drawing</item> to open the <item type=\"menuitem\">Drawing</item> toolbar." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">视图 - 工具栏- 绘图</item>打开<item type=\"menuitem\">绘图</item>工具栏。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">视图 - 工具栏- 绘图</item>」打开「<item type=\"menuitem\">绘图</item>」工具栏。" #: text_rotate.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15766,7 +15766,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149866\n" "help.text" msgid "Select the <link href=\"text/shared/02/01140000.xhp\" name=\"Text\"><item type=\"menuitem\">Text</item></link> icon <image id=\"img_id3149600\" src=\"cmd/sc_texttoolbox.png\" width=\"0.564cm\" height=\"0.564cm\"><alt id=\"alt_id3149600\">Icon</alt></image>." -msgstr "选择<link href=\"text/shared/02/01140000.xhp\" name=\"文本\"><emph>文本</emph></link>图标 <image id=\"img_id3149600\" src=\"cmd/sc_texttoolbox.png\" width=\"5.64mm\" height=\"5.64mm\"><alt id=\"alt_id3149600\">图标</alt></image>。" +msgstr "选择<link href=\"text/shared/02/01140000.xhp\" name=\"Text\"><item type=\"menuitem\">文本</item></link>图标 <image id=\"img_id3149600\" src=\"cmd/sc_texttoolbox.png\" width=\"0.564cm\" height=\"0.564cm\"><alt id=\"alt_id3149600\">图标</alt></image>。" #: text_rotate.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15774,7 +15774,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149590\n" "help.text" msgid "Drag in your document to draw the text object, and then type your text." -msgstr "在文档中拖动以绘制文字对象，然后键入文字。" +msgstr "在文档中拖动以绘制文字对象，然后输入文字。" #: text_rotate.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15782,7 +15782,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154415\n" "help.text" msgid "Click outside of the object, then click the text you entered. Click the <link href=\"text/shared/02/05090000.xhp\" name=\"Object Rotation Mode\"><item type=\"menuitem\">Rotate</item></link> icon <image id=\"img_id3145405\" src=\"cmd/sc_toggleobjectrotatemode.png\" width=\"0.564cm\" height=\"0.564cm\"><alt id=\"alt_id3145405\">Icon</alt></image> on the <item type=\"menuitem\">Drawing Object Properties</item> toolbar." -msgstr "在对象之外单击，然后单击所输入的文本。单击位于<emph>绘图对象属性</emph>工具栏上的<link href=\"text/shared/02/05090000.xhp\" name=\"对象旋转模式\"><emph>旋转</emph></link>图标 <image id=\"img_id3145405\" src=\"cmd/sc_toggleobjectrotatemode.png\" width=\"5.64mm\" height=\"5.64mm\"><alt id=\"alt_id3145405\">图标</alt></image>。" +msgstr "在对象之外点击，然后点击所输入的文本。点击位于「绘图对象属性」工具栏上的「<link href=\"text/shared/02/05090000.xhp\" name=\"Object Rotation Mode\"><item type=\"menuitem\">旋转</item></link>图标 <image id=\"img_id3145405\" src=\"cmd/sc_toggleobjectrotatemode.png\" width=\"0.564cm\" height=\"0.564cm\"><alt id=\"alt_id3145405\">图标</alt></image><item type=\"menuitem\"></item>。" #: text_rotate.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15798,7 +15798,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154844\n" "help.text" msgid "You can also right-click the text object, choose <emph>Position and Size</emph>, click the <emph>Rotation</emph> tab, and then enter a rotation angle or a new position for the object." -msgstr "也可以在文本对象上单击鼠标右键，选择<emph>位置和尺寸</emph>，单击<emph>旋转</emph>选项卡，然后输入对象的旋转角度或新位置。" +msgstr "也可以在文本对象上点击鼠标右键，选择「<emph>位置和尺寸</emph>」，点击「<emph>旋转</emph>」选项卡，然后输入对象的旋转角度或新位置。" #: text_rotate.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15854,7 +15854,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3147412\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - File</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 文件</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 文件</emph>」。" #: textdoc_inframe.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15862,7 +15862,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149839\n" "help.text" msgid "Locate the text document that you want to insert, and then click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "找到要插入的文本文档，然后单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "找到要插入的文本文档，然后点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: textdoc_inframe.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15894,7 +15894,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153404\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>插入 - 区域</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>插入 - 区域</emph>」。" #: textdoc_inframe.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15902,7 +15902,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153127\n" "help.text" msgid "Type a name in the <emph>New Section</emph> box, and then select the <emph>Link</emph> check box." -msgstr "在<emph>新区域</emph>框中键入名称，然后选中<emph>链接</emph>复选框。" +msgstr "在「<emph>新区域</emph>」框中输入名称，然后选中<emph>链接</emph>复选框。" #: textdoc_inframe.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15910,7 +15910,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149642\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">File Name</item> box, type the name of the file that you want to insert, or click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Browse</item> button and locate the file." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">文件名</item>框中，键入要插入的文件的名称，或单击浏览按钮 (<item type=\"menuitem\">...</item>) 并找到该文件。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">文件名</item>」框中，输入要插入的文件的名称，或点击浏览按钮 (<item type=\"menuitem\">...</item>) 并找到该文件。" #: textdoc_inframe.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15918,7 +15918,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149968\n" "help.text" msgid "If the target text document contains sections, you can select the section that you want to insert in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Sections</item> box." -msgstr "如果目标文本文档含有区域，您可以在<item type=\"menuitem\">区域</item>框中选择要插入的区域。" +msgstr "如果目标文本文档含有区域，您可以在「<item type=\"menuitem\">区域</item>」框中选择要插入的区域。" #: textdoc_inframe.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15934,7 +15934,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149862\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Insert</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>插入</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>插入</emph>」。" #: textdoc_inframe.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -15942,7 +15942,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145099\n" "help.text" msgid "$[officename] automatically updates the contents of the inserted section whenever the source document is changed. To manually update the contents of the section, choose <emph>Tools - Update - Update All</emph>." -msgstr "每当源文档发生改变时，$[officename] 都会自动更新所插入区域的内容。要手动更新区域的内容，请选择<emph>工具 - 更新 - 全部更新</emph>。" +msgstr "每当源文档发生改变时，$[officename] 都会自动更新所插入区域的内容。要手动更新区域的内容，请选择「<emph>工具 - 更新 - 全部更新</emph>」。" #: using_hyphen.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16006,7 +16006,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3148850\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click in a paragraph, and choose <emph>Paragraph</emph>." -msgstr "在段落中单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>段落</emph>。" +msgstr "在段落中点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>段落</emph>」。" #: using_hyphen.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16030,7 +16030,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153121\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: using_hyphen.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16070,7 +16070,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149867\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click the paragraph style that you want to hyphenate, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>." -msgstr "在要使用连字符的段落样式上单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>修改</emph>。" +msgstr "在要使用连字符的段落样式上点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>修改</emph>」。" #: using_hyphen.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16078,7 +16078,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145106\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the Text Flow tab." -msgstr "单击「文字流」选项卡。" +msgstr "点击「文字流」选项卡。" #: using_hyphen.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16094,7 +16094,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156250\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: using_hyphen.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16134,7 +16134,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153363\n" "help.text" msgid "To quickly insert a hyphen, click in the word where you want to add the hyphen, and then press <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Hyphen(-)." -msgstr "要快速插入连字符，请单击要添加连字符的字词，然后按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+连字符 (-) 键。" +msgstr "要快速插入连字符，请点击要添加连字符的字词，然后按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+连字符 (-) 键。" #: using_hyphen.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16150,7 +16150,7 @@ msgctxt "" "hd_id3154847\n" "help.text" msgid "To Manually Hyphenate Text in a Selection" -msgstr "手动用连字符连接选定的文本" +msgstr "手动用连字符连接选中的文本" #: using_hyphen.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16222,7 +16222,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149635\n" "help.text" msgid "On the <item type=\"menuitem\">Formatting</item> Bar, click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Bullets On/Off</item> icon <image id=\"img_id3156108\" src=\"cmd/sc_defaultbullet.png\" width=\"0.423cm\" height=\"0.423cm\"><alt id=\"alt_id3156108\">Icon</alt></image>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">格式</item>栏中，单击<item type=\"menuitem\">打开/关闭项目符号</item>图标 <image id=\"img_id3156108\" src=\"cmd/sc_defaultbullet.png\" width=\"0.222inch\" height=\"0.222inch\"><alt id=\"alt_id3156108\">图标</alt></image>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式</item>」栏中，点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">打开/关闭项目符号</item>」图标 <image id=\"img_id3156108\" src=\"cmd/sc_defaultbullet.png\" width=\"0.423cm\" height=\"0.423cm\"><alt id=\"alt_id3156108\">图标</alt></image>。" #: using_numbered_lists.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16230,7 +16230,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145403\n" "help.text" msgid "To remove bullets, select the bulleted paragraphs, and then click the <emph>Bullets On/Off</emph> icon on the <emph>Formatting</emph> Bar." -msgstr "要删除项目符号，请选择带有项目符号的段落，然后单击<emph>格式</emph>栏上的<emph>打开/关闭项目符号</emph>图标。" +msgstr "要删除项目符号，请选择带有项目符号的段落，然后点击「<emph>格式</emph>」栏上的<emph>打开/关闭项目符号</emph>图标。" #: using_numbered_lists.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16246,7 +16246,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154416\n" "help.text" msgid "To change the formatting of a bulleted list, choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>." -msgstr "要修改项目符号列表的格式，请选择<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 项目符号和编号</item>。" +msgstr "要修改项目符号列表的格式，请选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 项目符号和编号</item>」。" #: using_numbered_lists.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16254,7 +16254,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153390\n" "help.text" msgid "For example, to change the bulleting symbol, click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Options</item> tab, click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Select</item> button next to <item type=\"menuitem\">Character</item>, and then select a special character. You can also click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Image</item> tab, and then click a symbol style in the <item type=\"menuitem\">Selection</item> area." -msgstr "例如，要更改项目符号，请单击<item type=\"menuitem\">选项</item>选项卡，单击<item type=\"menuitem\">字符</item>旁边的浏览按钮 (<item type=\"menuitem\">...</item>)，然后选择一个特殊字符。还可以单击<item type=\"menuitem\">图形</item>选项卡，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">选择</item>区域中的符号样式。" +msgstr "例如，要更改项目符号，请点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">选项</item>」选项卡，点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">字符</item>旁边的浏览按钮 (<item type=\"menuitem\">...</item>)，然后选择一个特殊字符。还可以点击<item type=\"menuitem\">图形</item>」选项卡，然后点击<item type=\"menuitem\">选择</item>区域中的符号样式。" #: using_numbered_lists2.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16302,7 +16302,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149968\n" "help.text" msgid "On the <item type=\"menuitem\">Formatting</item> Bar, click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Numbering On/Off</item> icon <image id=\"img_id3153125\" src=\"cmd/sc_defaultnumbering.png\" width=\"0.1665in\" height=\"0.1665in\"><alt id=\"alt_id3153125\">Icon</alt></image>." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">格式</item>栏中，单击<emph>编号打开/关闭</emph>图标 <image id=\"img_id3153125\" src=\"cmd/sc_defaultnumbering.png\" width=\"0.222inch\" height=\"0.222inch\"><alt id=\"alt_id3153125\">图标</alt></image>。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式</item>」栏中，点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">编号打开/关闭</item>」图标 <image id=\"img_id3153125\" src=\"cmd/sc_defaultnumbering.png\" width=\"0.1665in\" height=\"0.1665in\"><alt id=\"alt_id3153125\">图标</alt></image>。" #: using_numbered_lists2.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16310,7 +16310,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149573\n" "help.text" msgid "To change the formatting and the hierarchy of a numbered list, click in the list, and then open the <emph>Bullets and Numbering</emph> toolbar." -msgstr "要修改编号列表的格式和分层结构，请单击列表，然后打开<emph>项目符号和编号</emph>工具栏。" +msgstr "要修改编号列表的格式和分层结构，请点击列表，然后打开「<emph>项目符号和编号</emph>」工具栏。" #: using_numbered_lists2.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16318,7 +16318,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153365\n" "help.text" msgid "To remove numbering, select the numbered paragraphs, and then click the <emph>Numbering On/Off</emph> icon on the <emph>Formatting</emph> Bar." -msgstr "要删除编号，请选择已编号的段落，然后单击<emph>格式</emph>栏上的<emph>打开/关闭编号</emph>图标。" +msgstr "要删除编号，请选择已编号的段落，然后点击「<emph>格式</emph>」栏上的<emph>打开/关闭编号</emph>图标。" #: using_numbered_lists2.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16334,7 +16334,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154246\n" "help.text" msgid "To change the formatting of a numbered list, click in the list, then choose <emph>Format - Bullets and Numbering</emph>." -msgstr "要修改编号列表的格式，请单击此列表，然后选择<emph>格式 - 项目符号和编号</emph>。" +msgstr "要修改编号列表的格式，请点击此列表，然后选择「<emph>格式 - 项目符号和编号</emph>」。" #: using_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16390,7 +16390,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153405\n" "help.text" msgid "You cannot apply manual numbering to paragraphs that are listed under \"Special Styles\" in the Styles window." -msgstr "您无法对“样式”窗口中“特殊样式”下列出的段落进行手动编号。" +msgstr "您无法对「样式」窗口中「特殊样式」下列出的段落进行手动编号。" #: using_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16406,7 +16406,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1072B\n" "help.text" msgid "To change the hierarchical level of a bullet in a list, click in front of the paragraph, then press the Tab key." -msgstr "要修改列表中项目符号的等级，请在段落前面单击，然后按 Tab 键。" +msgstr "要修改列表中项目符号的等级，请在段落前面点击，然后按 Tab 键。" #: using_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16414,7 +16414,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1072F\n" "help.text" msgid "To change the bullets or numbering format for the current paragraph only, select a character or word in the paragraph, choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>, and then click a new format." -msgstr "要仅修改当前段落的项目符号或编号格式，请在段落中选择一个字符或一个词，然后选择<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 项目符号和编号</item>，并单击新格式。" +msgstr "要仅修改当前段落的项目符号或编号格式，请在段落中选择一个字符或一个词，然后选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 项目符号和编号</item>」，并点击新格式。" #: using_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16422,7 +16422,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10733\n" "help.text" msgid "To change the bullet or numbering format for all paragraphs in the list, ensure that the cursor is in the list, choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>, and then click a new format." -msgstr "要修改列表中所有段落的项目符号或编号格式，请确保光标位于列表中，然后选择<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 项目符号和编号</item>，并单击新格式。" +msgstr "要修改列表中所有段落的项目符号或编号格式，请确保光标位于列表中，然后选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 项目符号和编号</item>」，并点击新格式。" #: using_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16430,7 +16430,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10737\n" "help.text" msgid "To apply the same bullet or numbering format to all paragraphs in the list, select all paragraphs, choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>, and then click a format." -msgstr "要对列表中所有段落应用相同的项目符号或编号格式，请选择所有段落，然后选择<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - -项目符号和编号</item>，并单击一种格式。" +msgstr "要对列表中所有段落应用相同的项目符号或编号格式，请选择所有段落，然后选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - -项目符号和编号</item>」，并点击一种格式。" #: using_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16438,7 +16438,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1073A\n" "help.text" msgid "You can also use the commands on the <link href=\"text/swriter/main0206.xhp\" name=\"Numbering Object Bar\">Bullets and Numbering</link> toolbar to edit a numbered or bulleted list. To change the numbering or bullet format, click the <emph>Bullets and Numbering</emph> icon." -msgstr "您也可以使用<link href=\"text/swriter/main0206.xhp\" name=\"编号对象工具栏\">项目符号和编号</link>工具栏上的命令，来编辑编号列表或项目符号列表。要修改编号或项目符号格式，请单击<emph>项目符号和编号</emph>图标。" +msgstr "您也可以使用<link href=\"text/swriter/main0206.xhp\" name=\"编号对象工具栏\">项目符号和编号</link>工具栏上的命令，来编辑编号列表或项目符号列表。要修改编号或项目符号格式，请点击「<emph>项目符号和编号</emph>」图标。" #: using_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16462,7 +16462,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149646\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">View - Styles</item>, and then click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Paragraph Styles</item> icon." -msgstr "选择 <item type=\"menuitem\">格式 - 样式</item> ，然后单击 <item type=\"menuitem\">段落样式</item> 图标。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">视图 - 样式</item>」，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">段落样式</item>」图标。" #: using_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16470,7 +16470,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149599\n" "help.text" msgid "Right-click the paragraph style that you want to apply numbering to, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>." -msgstr "在要应用编号的段落样式上单击鼠标右键，然后选择<emph>修改</emph>。" +msgstr "在要应用编号的段落样式上点击鼠标右键，然后选择「<emph>修改</emph>」。" #: using_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16478,7 +16478,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149850\n" "help.text" msgid "Click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Outline & Numbering</item> tab." -msgstr "单击 <item type=\"menuitem\">大纲和编号</item> 选项卡。" +msgstr "点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">大纲和编号</item>」选项卡。" #: using_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16486,7 +16486,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149874\n" "help.text" msgid "In the <item type=\"menuitem\">Numbering Style</item> box, select the type of numbering that you want to use." -msgstr "在<item type=\"menuitem\">编号样式</item>框中，选择要使用的编号类型。" +msgstr "在「<item type=\"menuitem\">编号样式</item>」框中，选择要使用的编号类型。" #: using_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16494,7 +16494,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3145113\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: using_numbering.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16542,7 +16542,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155920\n" "help.text" msgid "Click in the word that you want to look up or replace." -msgstr "单击要查找或替换的字。" +msgstr "点击要查找或替换的字。" #: using_thesaurus.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16550,7 +16550,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3155867\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <emph>Tools - Language - Thesaurus</emph>, or press <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+F7." -msgstr "选择<emph>工具 - 语言 - 同义词库</emph>，或按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+F7 组合键。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>工具 - 语言 - 同义词库</emph>」，或按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+F7 组合键。" #: using_thesaurus.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16558,7 +16558,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149848\n" "help.text" msgid "In the Alternatives list, click an entry to copy that related term to the \"Replace with\" text box." -msgstr "在“可选”列表中，单击相关项以将该条目复制到“替换成”文字框。" +msgstr "在「可选」列表中，点击相关项以将该条目复制到「替换成」文字框。" #: using_thesaurus.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16574,7 +16574,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149644\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>Replace</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>替换</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>替换</emph>」。" #: using_thesaurus.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16582,7 +16582,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3156263\n" "help.text" msgid "Initially, the thesaurus uses the language of the selected word in the document, if a thesaurus library for that language is installed. The title bar of the Thesaurus dialog displays the language in use." -msgstr "首先，若文档内选定字所用语言的同义词库已经安装，则同义词词典采用该语言。“同义词词典”对话框的标题栏中显示了所用的语言。" +msgstr "首先，若文档内选中字所用语言的同义词库已经安装，则同义词词典采用该语言。「同义词词典」对话框的标题栏中显示了所用的语言。" #: using_thesaurus.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16598,7 +16598,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3196263\n" "help.text" msgid "If a thesaurus library is installed for the language of a word, the context menu of the word shows a Synonyms submenu. Select any of the terms from the submenu to replace the word." -msgstr "若同义词库中安装了某个字的语言，该字的上下文菜单中会出现“同义词”子菜单。从子菜单中任选一个词替代该字。" +msgstr "若同义词库中安装了某个字的语言，该字的右键菜单中会出现「同义词」子菜单。从子菜单中任选一个词替代该字。" #: using_thesaurus.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16638,7 +16638,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN1076F\n" "help.text" msgid "$[officename] collects words that you frequently use in the current session. When you later type the first three letters of a collected word, $[officename] automatically completes the word." -msgstr "$[officename] 收集了当前会话中常用的字词。如果您以后键入所收集字词的前三个字母，$[officename] 就会自动补充完整该字词。" +msgstr "$[officename] 收集了当前会话中常用的字词。如果您以后输入所收集字词的前三个字母，$[officename] 就会自动补充完整该字词。" #: word_completion.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16646,7 +16646,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3149346\n" "help.text" msgid "If there is more than one word in the AutoCorrect memory that matches the three letters that you type, press <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Tab to cycle through the available words. To cycle in the opposite direction, press <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Shift+Tab." -msgstr "如果“自动更正”的记忆中有多个字词与键入的三个字母匹配，按 <item type=\"keycode\"><switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Tab</item> 组合键可以循环显示可用的字词。如果要以相反方向循环，请按 <item type=\"keycode\"><switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Shift+Tab</item> 组合键。" +msgstr "如果「自动更正」的记忆中有多个字词与输入的三个字母匹配，按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Tab 组合键可以循环显示可用的字词。如果要以相反方向循环，请按 <switchinline select=\"sys\"><caseinline select=\"MAC\">命令</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Shift+Tab 组合键。" #: word_completion.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16686,7 +16686,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN107A5\n" "help.text" msgid "Choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion</item>." -msgstr "选择<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正选项 - 字词补充完整</item>。" +msgstr "选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正选项 - 字词补充完整</item>」。" #: word_completion.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16742,7 +16742,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id2593462\n" "help.text" msgid "To fine-tune the word completion choose <item type=\"menuitem\">Tools – AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion</item> and select any of the following options:" -msgstr "要微调字词补充完整，请选择 <item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正 - 字词补充完整</item>，然后选择以下任意操作：" +msgstr "要微调字词补充完整，请选择「<item type=\"menuitem\">工具 - 自动更正 - 字词补充完整</item>」，然后选择以下任意操作:" #: word_completion_adjust.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16758,7 +16758,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10B03\n" "help.text" msgid "Select <emph>Append space</emph>." -msgstr "选择<emph>附加空格</emph>。" +msgstr "选择「<emph>附加空格</emph>」。" #: word_completion_adjust.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16766,7 +16766,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN10B0E\n" "help.text" msgid "The space character is appended after you type the first character of the next word after the auto-completed word. The space character is suppressed if the next character is a delimiter, such as a full stop or a new line character." -msgstr "在键入下一个词的第一个字符后，将自动在自动补充完整的单词之后追加一个空格。如果下一字符是一个分隔符（例如句号或分行符），则不追加空格。" +msgstr "在输入下一个词的第一个字符后，将自动在自动补充完整的单词之后追加一个空格。如果下一字符是一个分隔符（例如句号或分行符），则不追加空格。" #: word_completion_adjust.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16918,7 +16918,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id5458845\n" "help.text" msgid "<link href=\"text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp\">Using Word Completion</link>" -msgstr "<link href=\"text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp\">使用“字词补充完整”</link>" +msgstr "<link href=\"text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp\">使用「字词补充完整」</link>" #: words_count.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -16998,7 +16998,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id111620090113399\n" "help.text" msgid "The words can be a mix of letters, numbers, and special characters. So the following text counts as four words: abc123 1.23 \"$\" http://www.example.com." -msgstr "词中可同时包含字母、数字以及特殊字符。下列文字包含的词数记为 4：abc123 1.23 \"$\" http://www.example.com." +msgstr "词中可同时包含字母、数字以及特殊字符。下列文字包含的词数记为 4: abc123 1.23 \"$\" http://www.example.com." #: words_count.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -17014,7 +17014,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_idN106E2\n" "help.text" msgid "To get some more statistics about the document, choose <emph>File - Properties - Statistics</emph>." -msgstr "要获得文档的更多统计信息，请选择<emph>文件 - 属性 - 统计</emph>。" +msgstr "要获得文档的更多统计信息，请选择「<emph>文件 - 属性 - 统计</emph>」。" #: words_count.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -17118,7 +17118,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3153386\n" "help.text" msgid "Click <emph>OK</emph>." -msgstr "单击<emph>确定</emph>。" +msgstr "点击「<emph>确定</emph>」。" #: wrap.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -17142,7 +17142,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3154860\n" "help.text" msgid "Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose <emph>Wrap - Edit Contour</emph>." -msgstr "选择图形，然后单击鼠标右键并选择<emph>环绕 - 编辑轮廓</emph>。" +msgstr "选择图形，然后点击鼠标右键并选择「<emph>环绕 - 编辑轮廓</emph>」。" #: wrap.xhp msgctxt "" @@ -17150,7 +17150,7 @@ msgctxt "" "par_id3150231\n" "help.text" msgid "Use the tools to draw a new contour, and then click the <item type=\"menuitem\">Apply</item> icon (green check mark)." -msgstr "使用工具绘制新轮廓，然后单击<item type=\"menuitem\">应用</item>图标（绿色复选标记）。" +msgstr "使用工具绘制新轮廓，然后点击「<item type=\"menuitem\">应用</item>」图标（绿色复选标记）。" #: wrap.xhp msgctxt "" |